NS-Designer NS-Series NS-NSDC1

NS-Designer NS-Series NS-NSDC1
Cat. No. V074-E1-06
NS-Series
NS-NSDC1-V6
NS-Designer
Preliminary Material
Introduction
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the NS-Designer.
The NS-Designer is a software package that enables creating and maintaining screen data for
OMRON NS-series Programmable Terminals.
To take full advantage of the NS-series Programmable Terminals, please be sure that you understand
the functions and performance of the NS-Designer before attempting to use it. When using an NSseries PT, please also refer to the NS Series Setup Manual and the NS Series Programming Manual.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
Precaution
• The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the op-
eration manuals.
• Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or seri-
ous property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
• Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the
product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines
and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
• Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with
double safety mechanisms.
• This manual provides information for using the NS-Designer. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the NS-Designer and keep this manual close at hand for reference during installation
and operation.
P-1
Preliminary Material
Notation and Terminology
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Notation and Terminology
The following notation and terminology are used in this manual.
Notation
The following notation is used in this manual.
Note
Indicates additional information on operation, descriptions, or settings.
N
Noottee
♦
Terminology
PT
In this manual, indicates an NS-series Programmable Terminal.
PLC
Indicates OMRON Programmable Controllers.
Host
Indicates the PLC, FA computer, or personal computer functioning as the control
device and interfaced with the NS-series PT.
P-2
Preliminary Material
Related Manuals
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Related Manuals
The following manuals are used for NS-series PTs. (The boxes at the end of the catalog numbers indicate the revision code.)
NS-Designer Operating Procedures:
This manual
• NS-Designer Operation Manual................[email protected]
Describes operating procedures for the NS-Designer, which is used to create the screens displayed on
the PT and transfer them to the PT. It includes screen creation and transfer procedures. Refer to this
manual for information on operating methods and detailed operating procedures.
This manual deals with details of NS-Designer operation. Refer to the following manuals for information on NS-series PT operation.
Detailed Setting Methods for Functional Objects and Other Objects:
• NS Series Programming Manual ..............[email protected]
Describes the screen configurations, object functions, and host communications for the PT.
Basic NS-series PT Functions, Operations, and Limitations:
• NS series -V1/-V2 Setup Manual ...............[email protected]
Provides information on NS Series -V1 models (i.e., NS12-V1, NS10-V1, NS8-V1, and NS5-V1), and
NS Series -V2 models (i.e., NS5-V2).
Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.
Refer to the NS Series Programming Manual ([email protected]) for information on PT functions and specific
operating procedures.
First-time Users of NS-series Programmable Terminals:
• Tutorial (Installed from NS-Designer CD-ROM.)
This tutorial is designed for first-time users of NS-series PTs. It provides examples of operations from
creating a simple screen through starting actual operation. When the NS-Designer is installed, the tutorial is installed on the hard disk as PDF files.
NS-series Macro Function:
• Macro Reference (Installed from NS-Designer CD-ROM.)
The online help for the NS-Designer contains detailed information on the NS-series macro functions.
The Macro Reference contains essentially the same information, and it is installed on the hard disk as
PDF Files when the NS-Designer is installed. Use either the online help or the Macro Reference,
whichever is more convenient.
Confirming PLC Functions and Operation:
• PLC Operation Manuals
Refer to the operation manuals for individual PLC Units (e.g., the CPU Unit, Special I/O Units, CPU
Bus Units, Communications Units, etc) to obtain information on PLC functions and operation.
P-3
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
Notation and Terminology ...................................................................................................................................... 2
Related Manuals ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
Section 1 Overview
1-1
1-2
The NS-Designer........................................................................................................................................1-1
System Requirements.................................................................................................................................1-3
1-2-1
Hardware..........................................................................................................................................1-3
1-2-2
Equipment Required to Transfer Screen Data..................................................................................1-3
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions ............................................................................................................1-4
1-3-1
Project Overview..............................................................................................................................1-4
1-3-2
Manipulating Data on the PLC.........................................................................................................1-5
1-3-3
PT Memory ......................................................................................................................................1-6
1-3-4
Host Registration and Address.........................................................................................................1-7
1-3-5
Screen Types and Applications ........................................................................................................1-7
1-3-6
Object Types ....................................................................................................................................1-8
1-3-7
Functions Used to Create Screens..................................................................................................1-10
1-3-8
Data Log.........................................................................................................................................1-13
1-3-9
Alarms/Events................................................................................................................................1-13
1-3-10 Data Blocks ....................................................................................................................................1-14
1-3-11 Video Display ................................................................................................................................1-15
1-3-12 Importing and Exporting CSV Files...............................................................................................1-16
1-3-13 Validating.......................................................................................................................................1-16
1-4 Outline of Operational Flow.....................................................................................................................1-17
1-5 Menu Commands .....................................................................................................................................1-18
1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0...............................................................................................................1-21
1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0...............................................................................................................1-22
1-8 Functions Added in Version 5.0...............................................................................................................1-22
1-9 Functions Added in Version 6.0...............................................................................................................1-22
1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2...............................................................................................................1-23
Section 2
Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-1
2-2
Before Installing the NS-Designer .............................................................................................................2-1
Installing the NS-Designer .........................................................................................................................2-2
2-2-1
Basic Installation Operations ...........................................................................................................2-2
2-2-2
Installation Procedure ......................................................................................................................2-3
2-2-3
Uninstalling......................................................................................................................................2-7
2-2-4
Installing USB Drivers for NS-Series PTs. ......................................................................................2-9
2-3 Starting the NS-Designer .........................................................................................................................2-14
2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer ..........................................................................................................................2-15
2-5 User Interface ...........................................................................................................................................2-16
2-5-1
Basic Screen Functions ..................................................................................................................2-16
2-5-2
Dialog Box Main Functions ...........................................................................................................2-21
i
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 3
Manipulating Project Files
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
Projects.......................................................................................................................................................3-1
Creating New Projects................................................................................................................................3-2
Opening Existing Projects..........................................................................................................................3-3
Saving Projects...........................................................................................................................................3-5
Saving a Project Under a Different Name ..................................................................................................3-7
Opening Recent Projects ............................................................................................................................3-8
Opening Template Projects ........................................................................................................................3-9
3-7-1
Specifying Template Projects (Flowchart Step 1)..........................................................................3-10
3-7-2
Reusing Screens (Flowchart Steps 2 to 4)......................................................................................3-10
3-7-3
Canceling Template Projects..........................................................................................................3-11
3-8 Project Maintenance.................................................................................................................................3-12
3-8-1
Procedures......................................................................................................................................3-12
3-9 Project Properties .....................................................................................................................................3-17
3-9-1
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................3-17
3-10 Changing the PT Model ...........................................................................................................................3-21
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1
Basic Operations ........................................................................................................................................4-1
4-1-1
Setting Screen Properties .................................................................................................................4-1
4-1-2
Grid Setting ......................................................................................................................................4-4
4-1-3
Switching Items Displayed for Objects............................................................................................4-5
4-1-4
Changing the Display.....................................................................................................................4-14
4-1-5
Switch Label ..................................................................................................................................4-15
4-1-6
Show Touch Points ........................................................................................................................4-16
4-1-7
Zoom ..............................................................................................................................................4-16
4-1-8
Refreshing ......................................................................................................................................4-17
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens....................................................................................................................4-18
4-2-1
Creating New Screens ....................................................................................................................4-18
4-1-2
Screen Maintenance .......................................................................................................................4-22
4-1-3
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................4-23
4-3 Sheets .....................................................................................................................................................4-24
4-3-1
Creating New Sheets ......................................................................................................................4-24
4-3-2
Opening Existing Sheets ................................................................................................................4-25
4-3-3
Closing Sheets................................................................................................................................4-25
4-3-4
Saving Sheets .................................................................................................................................4-26
4-3-5
Applying Sheets .............................................................................................................................4-26
4-3-6
Sheet Maintenance .........................................................................................................................4-27
4-4 Frames .....................................................................................................................................................4-28
4-4-1
Creating Frame Tab Names............................................................................................................4-30
4-4-2
Switching Frame Pages ..................................................................................................................4-31
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1
Creating Functional Objects.......................................................................................................................5-1
5-1-1
Creating One Object at a Time.........................................................................................................5-1
5-1-2
Property Settings ..............................................................................................................................5-2
5-1-3
Creating Functional Objects Using Tables.......................................................................................5-3
ii
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-2
Creating Fixed Objects...............................................................................................................................5-8
5-2-1
Drawing New Fixed Objects............................................................................................................5-8
5-3 Pop-up Menus ..........................................................................................................................................5-12
5-4 Editing .....................................................................................................................................................5-13
5-4-1
Undo...............................................................................................................................................5-13
5-4-2
Redo ...............................................................................................................................................5-13
5-4-3
Cut..................................................................................................................................................5-14
5-4-4
Copy...............................................................................................................................................5-15
5-4-5
Paste ...............................................................................................................................................5-16
5-4-6
Delete .............................................................................................................................................5-17
5-4-7
Find ................................................................................................................................................5-17
5-4-8
Replace...........................................................................................................................................5-20
5-4-9
Select All........................................................................................................................................5-22
5-4-10 Repeat ............................................................................................................................................5-24
5-5 Layout Functions......................................................................................................................................5-25
5-5-1
Changing Size ................................................................................................................................5-25
5-5-2
Moving Objects..............................................................................................................................5-25
5-5-3
Aligning and Distributing Objects .................................................................................................5-26
5-5-4
Make Same Size.............................................................................................................................5-27
5-5-5
Ordering Objects ............................................................................................................................5-29
5-5-6
Nudging Objects ............................................................................................................................5-29
5-5-7
Rotating and Flipping Objects .......................................................................................................5-30
5-5-8
Modifying Objects .........................................................................................................................5-31
5-5-9
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects ................................................................................................5-33
5-6 Colors .....................................................................................................................................................5-35
5-7 Address Settings.......................................................................................................................................5-36
5-7-1
Setting Addresses...........................................................................................................................5-37
5-7-2
Registering Hosts ...........................................................................................................................5-38
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists ..................................................................................5-42
5-8-1
Redisplaying Lists..........................................................................................................................5-45
5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used ..............................................................................................................5-46
5-9-1
Displaying Lists of Used Functional Objects.................................................................................5-46
5-9-2
Jumping to Screens, Tables, and Frames .......................................................................................5-48
5-10 Batch Settings...........................................................................................................................................5-49
5-11 Listing Addresses Used ............................................................................................................................5-55
5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses....................................................................................................................5-59
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects ................................................................................................5-63
5-13-1 Registering Library Objects ...........................................................................................................5-63
5-14 Object Defaults.........................................................................................................................................5-68
5-14-1 Registering Defaults.......................................................................................................................5-68
5-14-2 Resetting Defined Defaults ............................................................................................................5-68
5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps ...................................................................................................................5-70
5-16 Options .....................................................................................................................................................5-71
5-16-1 Color Dialog...................................................................................................................................5-71
5-16-2 Edit/Disp. .......................................................................................................................................5-71
5-16-3 Editor .............................................................................................................................................5-72
5-16-4 Labels.............................................................................................................................................5-72
iii
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1
Registering Macros ....................................................................................................................................6-1
6-1-1
Registering Macros to Projects ........................................................................................................6-2
6-1-2
Registering Macros to Functional Objects .......................................................................................6-5
6-2 List of Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................6-8
Section 7 System Settings
7-1
Settings.......................................................................................................................................................7-1
7-1-1
Common Procedure..........................................................................................................................7-1
7-1-2
PT Operations ..................................................................................................................................7-1
7-1-3
Initial ................................................................................................................................................7-2
7-1-4
History..............................................................................................................................................7-4
7-1-5
Comm-All ........................................................................................................................................7-5
7-1-6
Detailed ..........................................................................................................................................7-10
7-1-7
Printer.............................................................................................................................................7-16
7-1-8
Video..............................................................................................................................................7-17
Section 8 Testing
8-1
8-2
Test Function..............................................................................................................................................8-1
Test Tool ....................................................................................................................................................8-6
8-2-1
Display Formats ...............................................................................................................................8-6
8-2-2
Setting Values ..................................................................................................................................8-7
Section 9 Validation
9-1
9-2
Validation Settings .....................................................................................................................................9-1
Validation Results ......................................................................................................................................9-2
9-2-1
No Error Detected ............................................................................................................................9-2
9-2-2
Error Detected ..................................................................................................................................9-2
9-3 List of Validation Items..............................................................................................................................9-4
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT......................................................................................................................10-1
10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting............................................................................10-2
10-1-2 Communications Settings for NS-Designer .................................................................................10-14
10-1-3 Transferring Project Data.............................................................................................................10-20
10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data .............................................................................................................10-23
10-1-5 Transferring the System Program ................................................................................................10-25
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card......................................................................................10-29
10-2-1 Preparations for Transferring to a Memory Card in PT ...............................................................10-29
10-2-2 Procedure for Transferring Data to a Memory Card in the PT.....................................................10-31
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA ...................................................................................................................10-33
10-3-1 Overview of SPMA......................................................................................................................10-33
10-3-2 SPMA Features ............................................................................................................................10-33
10-3-3 System Configuration...................................................................................................................10-34
10-3-4 Procedural Example .....................................................................................................................10-36
iv
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 11 Printing
11-1 Printing Project Information.....................................................................................................................11-1
11-1-1 Printing Samples ............................................................................................................................11-2
11-2 Printing Page Information ........................................................................................................................11-4
11-2-1 Printing Samples ............................................................................................................................11-6
11-3 Previews ...................................................................................................................................................11-8
11-4 Outputting to an RTF File ........................................................................................................................11-9
11-5 Headers and Footers ...............................................................................................................................11-10
11-6 Margins ..................................................................................................................................................11-12
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-1 Exporting CSV Files ................................................................................................................................12-1
12-2 Editing CSV Files.....................................................................................................................................12-2
12-3 Importing CSV Files ................................................................................................................................12-3
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................13-1
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens................................................................................................13-2
13-2-1 Inputting Multi-language Characters in NS-Designer Property Settings .......................................13-2
13-2-2 Displaying Multi-language Characters Using Indirect Object Specification .................................13-9
13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export Function....................13-11
Appendices
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
Appendix 9
Quick Reference............................................................................................................................ A-1
Objects ........................................................................................................................................ A-12
Shortcut Keys.............................................................................................................................. A-16
Version Information.................................................................................................................... A-17
Resource Report.......................................................................................................................... A-18
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... A-19
Connecting Cable Specifications ................................................................................................ A-26
Details of CLK Status ................................................................................................................. A-28
Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products ......................................... A-31
v
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 1
Overview
This section describes the specifications and functions of the NS-Designer to provide a basic understanding of
the capabilities of the NS-Designer for first-time users.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
The NS-Designer .........................................................................................................................................1-1
System Requirements ..................................................................................................................................1-3
Basic Configuration and Functions..............................................................................................................1-4
Outline of Operational Flow ......................................................................................................................1-17
Menu Commands.......................................................................................................................................1-18
Functions Added in Version 3.0 ................................................................................................................1-21
Functions Added in Version 4.0 ................................................................................................................1-22
Functions Added in Version 5.0 ................................................................................................................1-22
Functions Added in Version 6.0 ................................................................................................................1-22
Functions Added in Version 6.2 ................................................................................................................1-23
Section 1 Overview
1-1 The NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-1 The NS-Designer
The NS-Designer is an application software package that can be run on Windows 95, 98, NT, Me,
2000, or XP to create screen data for NS-series Programmable Terminals (referred to as "PTs").
The NS-Designer enables using a graphic Windows interface and Windows operating environment so
that screens can be created simply and easily by practically anyone.
The data created on the NS-Designer consists of the following objects.
Data created on
NS-Designer
(project)
User screens
Fixed objects
Rectangles
Circles/ovals
Lines
Polylines
Polygons
Sectors
Arcs
Functional objects
Buttons
ON/OFF buttons
Word buttons
Command buttons
Lamps
Bit lamps
Word lamps
Display and input
Numeral display & input
String display & input
Thumbwheel switches
Temporary input
Display
Text
List selections
Level meters
Bitmaps
Analogue meters
Broken-line graphs
Data log graphs
Video display
System clock
Dates
Times
Alarms/events
Data block tables
Tables
Functional objects
Frames
Fixed objects
Functional objects
Tables
Backgrounds
Sheets
Fixed objects
Functional objects
Tables
Frames
Numeric units and scale settings
Alarm/event settings
Data log settings
Data block settings
Library
1-1
Alarm/event displays
Alarm/event summaries
and histories
Section 1 Overview
1-1 The NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Sheet
User Screen
Fixed graphic
Frame
Functional
object
Functional
object
Functional Table
object
Overlaid
Sheet objects
Windows
Product Components
The following software and data are included with the [email protected]
• NS-Designer Software
• Transfer Program
Tool for transferring systems, projects, screens, and settings files.
• Memory Card Transfer Tool
Tool for exchanging data with the Memory Card mounted to the PT.
• NT631C Conversion Support Tool
• CX-Server
• PT System Program (replacement program)
• Operation Manuals
The operation manuals include an NS-series Macro Reference, an NS-Series Tutorial Manual, and a
Host Connection Manual.
• Sample Data
Sample data of the screens created in the NS-series tutorial is included.
• Switch Box Utility
Tool for helping to debug the operation of PLCs.
• SAP (Smart Active Parts) Data
Libraries containing setting/monitor screens (e.g., for Position Control Units and Temperature Controllers).
1-2
Section 1 Overview
1-2 System Requirements
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-2 System Requirements
The following are required to use the NS-Designer.
1-2-1
Hardware
Recommended Processor
Intel Celeron 400 MHz or better required.
Computer
IBM PC/AT or compatible capable of running the required OS.
Recommended Memory
64 Mbytes or more required. (Be sure to provide sufficient capacity, observing the recommend values
for the OS.)
Available Disk Space
200 Mbytes or more recommended.
CD-ROM Drive
Required to install the NS-Designer.
Monitor
VGA monitor required for DOS computers. A resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or higher is recommended.
If the display resolution in the Windows screen properties is set to a lower setting, such as 640 x 480
pixels, portions of the NS-Designer windows may not be displayed. If this happens, increase the resolution. If large display fonts are used, not all of the text may fit in dialog boxes, preventing correct display. If this happens, use the small display fonts.
Mouse
A mouse supported by the OS must be used.
Operating System
Any of the following operating systems can be used: Microsoft Windows 95, Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft Windows Me, or Microsoft Windows NT (version 4.0, service pack 6a or higher), Microsoft Windows 2000 (service pack 3 or higher), or Microsoft XP.
Microsoft Windows 3.1 is not supported.
Internet Explorer version 5.5 or higher is required.
1-2-2
Equipment Required to Transfer Screen Data
RS-232C connection cable
Ethernet cable
Memory Cards
Refer to Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications for cable specifications.
1-3
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
1-3-1
Project Overview
A project contains all of the objects and settings required for a group of user screens.
The project name is specified to access data when editing on the NS-Designer or transferring data to
PT.
System setting for
PT operation
User screens
Password setting
Unit and scale
setting
Library objects
Data log setting
Alarm/event
setting
A wide variety of objects can be used as required to create screens.
Some of the objects that can be used are described below.
Fixed Objects
Fixed objects, which do not provide any input functions, can be created on a screen.
Although fixed objects can be set to flicker, they are otherwise displayed on the screen in a constant
state.
Functional Objects
Functional objects can be used to communicate with internal memory in the PT or with a PLC. Functional objects have both graphic and operational properties. The display of functional objects can be
changed according to the status of the PT or PLC, and they can be used to input data through operations from the PT.
Table
A table object provides multiple functional objects in a single table format.
Frame
A frame object enables the creation of areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be
switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the
functional objects configuring each page can be switched based on PT or PLC status. Frames can
contain fixed objects, functional objects, and tables.
Background
A background is a graphic screen that is displayed as the background of other screens.
Bitmap files and JPEG files can be displayed as backgrounds.
Registering Created Objects
Created objects can be registered in a library so that they can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens.
The following objects can be registered in the library.
Fixed objects, functional objects, tables, and frames
1-4
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-2
Manipulating Data on the PLC
Data can be input to and output from a PLC using the following objects, enabling values in memory to
be set or the screen data to be updated according to changes in memory.
Input
PT
PLC
Output
Object
ON/OFF Button
Word Button
Command Button
Switch Screen
Key Button
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Numeral Display & Input
String Display & Input
Thumbwheel Switch
Text
List Selection
Level Meter
Bitmap
Analogue Meter
Video Display
Broken-line Graph
Data Log Graph
Date/Time
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary & History
Input
OK
OK
Output
OK
OK

OK
Indirect Specification of Screens
OK
Indirect Specification of Character
Strings to Send
OK

OK
(Writing Screen Page Numbers)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
(Indirect Reference of Display
Strings)
OK
(Address for specifying the File
Lines)
OK
OK
(Indirect Specification of Display
Data)
OK

OK
OK
OK

OK
(Specifying Display Update Bits)
(Specifying Number of Display Refreshes)
(Broken-line Monitor Address)
OK
(Monitor Address)
(Log Timing)
(Scale for Time Axis)
(Address for updating Display)

OK
OK
Data Block Table
Frames
OK
OK
Temporary input

1-5



OK
(Writing Selected Line Number)
(Writing Selected Character Strings)








OK
(Writing Alarm Ids)
OK


Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-3
PT Memory
PT memory is made up of internal memory and system memory.
Internal Memory
The internal memory contained in the PT can be read and written by the user. Internal memory can be
allocated as required for settings, such as the communications addresses of functional objects.
The internal memory is divided into two sections.
Memory
$B
Contents
Bit Memory
Bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information.
Up to 32 Kbits (32,768 bits) can be used.
Word Memory
Word memory is used to store numeral and character string data.
Each word contains 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for
character strings and 32-bit data.
Up to 32 Kwords (32,768 words) can be used.
Holding Bit Memory
Holding bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information.
Up to 8 Kbits (8,192 bits) of data can be held in this area even if the PT power is
turned OFF.
Holding Word Memory
Holding word memory is used to save numerical values and character-string data.
Each word consists of 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for
character strings with a user-defined length and 32-bit data.
Up to 8 Kwords (8,192 words) of data can be held in this area even if the PT power
is turned OFF.
$W
$HB
$HW
System Memory
System memory is used to change information between the host and the PT, such as controlling the
PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system memory is divided into two sections.
Memory
$SB
$SW
Contents
System Bit Memory
The system bit memory contains 52 bits with predefined functions.
System Word Memory
The system word memory contains 38 words with predefined functions.
1-6
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-4
Host Registration and Address
PLC words and bits can be allocated as communications addresses for functional objects and other
objects. To enable this, a name is registered for each PLC. This setting is called the host registration.
Refer to 1-3 Communicating with the Host in the NS series Programming Manual for details on the
host.
Communicates
with address
10000 in host B
Communicates
with address
10000 in host C
Communicates with
address 10000 in host A
HOST A
1-3-5
HOST B
HOST C
Screen Types and Applications
The following screens can be displayed on the PT: User screens with objects configured as required
by the user, sheets, and system screens with predefined functions.
Screen type
User Screen
Base Screen
Pop-up Screen
Sheet
System Menu
Contents
Used to create normal screens.
Basic screens displayed during PT operation.
Pop-up screens can be displayed overlapping other screens.
Up to 3 pop-up screens can be displayed at the same time.
Sheets are screens used when the same images are to be displayed on more than one
screen. They are used together with other screens, such as base screens and pop-up
screens.
Up to 10 sheets can be created in each project.
The System Menu Screen is predefined and cannot be changed by the user. It is used to
set or confirm various special functions of the PT, such as to initialize data or to access
various histories.
1-7
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-6
Object Types
Some details on the types of object that can be positioned on a screen are described below.
Fixed Objects
The following fixed objects can be used.
Rectangle
Circle/Oval
Straight Line or Arrow
Polyline
Polygon
Sector
Arc
1-8
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Functional Objects
The following functional objects can be used.
Icon
Name
ON/OFF Button
Word Button
Command Button
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Text
Numeral Display & Input
String Display & Input
List Selection
Numerically display the word data from the specified address and
input data from a tenkey pad.
Display the character string from the word data from the specified
address and input data from a keyboard.
Display the registered characters string in a list for selection.
Bitmap
Numerically display the word data from the specified address and
increment and decrement the data when increment/decrement buttons are pressed.
Display graphs in three colors in circles, semi-circles or quarter circles for the word data at the specified address.
Display levels in three colors for the word data at the specified address.
Display a broken-line graph for the word data at the specified address.
Display bitmaps.
Video Display
Display images from video cameras and Vision Sensors.
Alarm/Event Display
Display alarms or events that have occurred in order of priority.
Alarm/Event Summary
and History
Date
Display summaries or histories of alarms or events that have occurred.
Display and set date.
Time
Display and set time.
Data Log Graph
Display trend graphs for the word data at specified addresses.
Data Block Table
Writes to and reads from PLC preset recipe data, such as instructions for manufacturing process.
Display numerical values and character strings that have been input
during creation of a tenkey or keyboard for Numeral Display & Input
and String Display & Input objects using command buttons.
Thumbwheel Switch
@
‡
Contents
Control the ON/OFF status of the specified write address. Any of four
action types can be selected.
Set numeric data at the specified address. Values can also be increased and decreased.
Perform special processing, such as switching screens, controlling
pop-up screens, controlling video, etc.
Turn ON and OFF according to the ON/OFF status of the specified
address.
Light in 10 steps according to the value in the specified address (0 to
9).
Display the registered character string.
Analogue Meter
Level Meter
Broken-line Graph
Temporary Input
1-9
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-7
Functions Used to Create Screens
The following functions can be conveniently used to make screens more effective.
Creating Tables
Functional objects of the same type can be created as a group in a table.
Functional objects can be easily created and organized in a table simply by specifying the type of
functional object, the number of rows, and the number of columns. Item names (text) can also be
added to the cells of the table.
The properties of the functional objects can be set as a group, and addresses can be automatically
allocated by setting offsets.
Refer to Creating Tables under 5-1 Creating Functional Objects for more information.
Item names are created with Text objects
Functional objects: Numeral Display & Input objects
Number of horizontal items: 4
Number of vertical items: 3
Address, such as $W100,
$W101, $W102, etc., are
allocated.
Common properties for all the
Numeral Display & Input objects
are set at the same time.
Creating Frames
A frame object enables the creation of areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be
switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the
functional objects configuring each page can be switched using the page switching function of the
frame. A frame can contain up to 256 frame pages, and objects can be pasted as required within each
frame page.
Refer to 4-4 Frames for details.
Groups
More than one functional object or fixed object can be defined as a group.
The group, which contains more than one functional or fixed object, can be rotated, flipped, or sized as
if it were just one object.
Grouped objects can also be created with other functional or fixed objects or placed in other groups.
Refer to Grouping and Ungrouping Objects under 5-5 Layout Functions for more information.
Object Library
An object and all of its property settings can be registered as one object. Created objects registered in
a library can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens. Refer to 5-13 Library
Registration and Sharing Objects for details.
Smart Active Parts
Setting and monitor screens (such as setting screens for Position Control Units and Temperature Controllers) are pre-installed as standard library objects for the NS-Designer. For details, refer to How to
use Smart Active Parts (PDF) included with the NS-Designer.
1-10
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Selecting Fixed Objects for Buttons and Lamps
Specified fixed objects can be displayed for ON/OFF buttons, word buttons, bit lamps, and word lamps
to create more graphic displays.
Object
selected.
Object
selected.
Drawing Fixed Objects
Fixed objects, which do not provide any functions themselves, can be drawn on a screen. The following fixed objects can be drawn. Rectangles, circles, ovals, straight lines, polylines, polygons, sectors,
and arcs
Creating Backgrounds
General-purpose image data can be used as backgrounds for user screens. The following file types
can be used.
• Bitmap files (.BMP)
• JPEG files (.JPG)
Switching Displays
Displays can be switched to check the operation of screens created offline.
The following switching functions can be used.
Switching Screens
• Switching Frame Pages
Edited frame pages can be switched forward and backward.
Refer to Switching Frame Pages under 4-4 Frames for details.
• Switching Screens
Edited screens can be switched forward and backward.
Refer to Switching Screens under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
• Zooming
Screens can be zoomed in and out.
Refer to Zoom under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
Switching Object Displays
• ID Displays
Object ID numbers can be displayed.
Refer to Switching Items Displayed for Objects under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
• Error Object Displays
Objects for which errors were detected in validating are displayed with red borders.
Refer to Show ID under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
1-11
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
• Displaying Sheet Objects
The sheet objects overlapped on base screens can be displayed.
Refer to Show Sheet Object under Switching Items Displayed for Objects under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
Sheet Objects Hidden Sheet Objects Displayed
• Displaying Switch Labels
The specified switch labels can be displayed.
Refer to Switch Label under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
• Simulating ON/OFF Status
The functional objects can be displayed in their ON status.
Refer to Displaying ON Status under Switching Items Displayed for Objects under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
ON Status
OFF Status
`
• Displaying Addresses
The communications addresses set for each functional object can be displayed. Refer to Show Address under Switching Items Displayed for Objects under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
Normal Display
Address Display
1-12
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-8
Data Log
The stored data for specified addresses is displayed as a graph.
Up to 100 groups can be registered for each project. Up to 16 addresses can be registered for each
group.
Up to 50 addresses can be registered for constant logging.
1-3-9
Alarms/Events
Addresses can be registered for alarm monitoring to provide notification for alarms from the specified
addresses. Registration can also be used to display events, such as operation startup.
Alarm-related functional objects can be used to display alarms and events that have occurred or to
display alarm/event histories.
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 5,000 alarms can be registered.
Alarm 500
Simple Display
List
1-13
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-10 Data Blocks
Data blocks (recipes) enable reading/writing numeric values and character strings from/to memory areas, such as those in a PLC. Data blocks can be used to easily change the arrangement of the system. Create the data in CSV files and store them in the PT beforehand. The created data can be used
to make changes while operating the PT.
Examples: Setting the width (numeric value), height (numeric values), and color (character string) in
the PLC (Refer to the figure shown below.)
Set width: 150, height: 54, and color: blue for product B.
Just by selecting product B, these three items can be set for the PLC. If product A is selected, a width
of 100, height setting of 52, and a color setting of red will be set for the PLC.
Processing conditions for product B
(150, 54, blue) set in PLC
To controlled devices
Data block
Width
Height
Color
Product A
Red
B
Product
B
Blue
Product
Produ
Produ
Yellow
Red
Conditions for product B are
selected and set in PLC.
Product
B
Blue
Using data block, the user does not need to save the data in the PLC beforehand, so that memory of
the PLC can be saved and ladder program can be reduced. Data blocks also have the following features.
• Data in CSV format can be edited and managed on a personal computer.
• Data can be edited on the PT.
• Data can be written to a Memory Card.
• Data can be read from a Memory Card.
• Processes values and character strings can be handled.
• Maximum number of rows: 1,000. Maximum number of columns: 500. Data blocks with both 1,000
rows and 500 columns, however, cannot be set.
Refer to 2-16 Data Blocks - Restrictions for Data Blocks in the Programming Manual for details.
1-14
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-11 Video Display
Install a Video Input Unit (NS-CA001) on the PT to display the picture output from video devices such
as a video camera or Vision Sensor on the PT. Up to four video devices can be connected to the PT.
There are two input methods: NTSC and PAL.
1
2
3
4
NTSC/PAL
4 ch
3 ch
2 ch
1 ch
1
2
3
4
Video camera or
Vision Sensor
1-15
Section 1 Overview
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3-12 Importing and Exporting CSV Files
The property settings of functional objects can be edited as CSV files.
Export property settings to CSV files, edit them with a standard spreadsheet program or other editing
tool, and then import them back into the NS-Designer to set the properties of functional objects.
Refer to Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files for details.
Editing in spreadsheet software
Importing
1-3-13 Validating
Functional object settings are checked according to validation items to see if any mistakes have been
made.
Any errors that are detected are displayed in a list. The functional or fixed objects where errors exist
can also be displayed.
Refer to Section 9 Validation for details.
1-16
Section 1 Overview
1-4 Outline of Operational Flow
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-4 Outline of Operational Flow
Screen data is created with the NS-Designer as follows:
Start NS-Designer.
Select PT model.
Select in dialog box.
Open screen.
A screen is automatically opened
when a new project is created.
Otherwise screens are opened
with File - Open Screen
Make system settings.
Settings - System Setting
Set project properties.
Settings - Project Properties
Set screen properties.
Settings - Screen Properties
Register host.
Settings - Register Host
Lay out objects.
Save screen data.
File - Save Screen
Save project.
File - Save Project
Check project by printing data.
File - Print
Check object operation with test tool.
Tools - Test
Transfer data to PT.
File – Transfer Data
N
Noottee
♦ Start actual operation only after sufficiently checking the operation of the screen data and host programming.
1-17
Section 1 Overview
1-5 Menu Commands
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-5 Menu Commands
The commands that appear on the pull-down menus of the NS-Designer and their functions are described in the following tables.
File Menu
Command
New Project
Open Project
Save Project
Save Project As
Template
Project Maintenance
New Screen
Open Screen
Close Screen
Save Screen
Save All
Open Sheet
Apply Sheet
Import CSV File
Export CSV File
Transfer Data
Print
Recent Projects
Exit
Function
Creates a new project.
Opens an existing project.
Saves the current project (overwrites the existing file).
Saves the current project under a specified name.
Specifies a template project.
Copies, deletes, backs up, and restores projects.
Creates a new screen under the current project.
Opens an existing screen in the current project.
Closes the screen currently being edited.
Saves the current screen.
Saves (overwrites) all of the data for the current project.
Creates new sheet or edits a sheet.
Sets a screen with overlapping sheets.
Imports project or screen data saved in CSV format to the current project or
screen.
Exports the current project or screen data to a file in CSV format.
Downloads screen data created on the NS-Designer to the PT or uploads screen
data from the PT to the NS-Designer.
Outputs current project or screen information to a printer or to a file. Select Print
to display a preview.
Displays a list of currently edited projects. (Up to four projects are displayed.)
Ends the NS-Designer.
Edit Menu
Command
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Offset Paste
Delete
Find
Replace
Select All
Repeat
Function
Discards changes and restores the previous status.
Restores the changes discarded with Undo.
Deletes the selected objects and places them in the internal buffer.
Copies the selected objects and places them in the internal buffer.
Pastes objects that have been cut or copied.
Pastes objects that have been cut or copies with offset addresses.
Deletes the selected objects.
Searches for functional objects using addresses or character strings as keywords.
Replaces addresses set for functional objects.
Selects all objects on a screen or all functional or fixed objects of a specific type.
Copies the specified object the specified number of times horizontally or vertically.
1-18
Section 1 Overview
1-5 Menu Commands
NS-Designer Operation Manual
View Menu
Command
Toolbars
Status Bar
Switch Label
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Previous Frame Page
Next Frame Page
Simulate ON/OFF
Show ID
Show Address
Show Error Object
Show Sheet Object
Show Touch Points
Zoom
Refresh
Function
Displays and hides the toolbars.
(Standard, functional object, fixed object, operation, formatting, color, and address
settings)
Displays and hides the status bar.
Switches to the specified label display.
Displays the previous screen.
Displays the next screen.
Displays the previous frame page.
Displays the next frame page.
Switches functional objects between ON and OFF status displays.
Displays and hides ID numbers for objects.
Displays and hides address displays for functional objects.
Displays and hides error marks for objects.
Switches the display of objects registered in sheets.
Displays the touch points on the PT.
Zooms the display in and out.
Redraws the screen.
Functional Objects Menu
Command
ON/OFF Button
Word Button
Command Button
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Text
Numeral Display & Input
String Display & Input
List Selection
Thumbwheel Switch
Analogue Meter
Level Meter
Broken-line Graph
Bitmap
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary &
History
Date
Time
Data Log Graph
Data Block Table
Video Display
Frame
Table
Temporary Input
Function
Starts creation of an ON/OFF button.
Starts creation of a word button.
Starts creation of a command button.
Starts creation of a bit lamp.
Starts creation of a word lamp.
Starts creation of text.
Starts creation of a number display and input object.
Starts creation of a string display and input object.
Starts creation of a list selection object.
Starts creation of a thumbwheel switch.
Starts creation of an analogue meter.
Starts creation of a level meter.
Starts creation of a broken-line graph.
Starts creation of a bitmap.
Starts creation of an alarm/event display object.
Starts creation of an alarm/event summary & history.
Starts creation of a data object.
Starts creation of a time lamp.
Starts creation of a data log graph.
Starts creation of a data block table.
Starts creation of a video display.
Starts creation of a frame region.
Starts creation of a table on a table creation screen.
Starts creation of a temporary input.
1-19
Section 1 Overview
1-5 Menu Commands
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Fixed Objects Menu
Command
Rectangle
Circle/Oval
Straight line
Polyline
Function
Starts creation of a rectangle.
Starts creation of a circle or oval.
Starts creation of a straight line.
Starts creation of a continuous straight line.
Polygon
Sector
Arc
Starts creation of a polygon.
Starts creation of a pie-shaped sector.
Starts creation of an arc.
Settings Menu
Command
Object Properties
Edit Label
Change Settings at Once
Flicker Setting
Password Setting
Unit/Scale Setting
Alarm/Event Setting
Data Log Setting
Data Block Setting
Change Input Order
Project Properties
Screen Properties
System Setting
Reset Defined Default
Change PT Model
Register Host
Function
Sets the properties of the selected functional object.
Enables direct editing of labels on the screen without opening a property dialog
box.
Enables editing the basic properties of the selected functional objects in a table.
Functional objects can be added and deleted as well.
Sets the flicker operation parameters.
Sets the password.
Displays the unit and scale conversions for a numeral display.
Set the alarm function (addresses, messages, etc.).
Set the data log function (e.g., data log groups).
Performs registration and correction of data blocks.
Sets the order for shifting the focus for objects that can be input.
Sets the project properties.
Sets the screen properties.
Sets the PT operating parameters.
Resets all of the settings made for an object. (Functional and fixed objects)
Sets the model of the NS-series PT.
Registers the host.
Layout Menu
Command
Align/ Distribution
Modify
Function
Aligns the position of more than one selected object. (Left, Center in a Column,
Right, Top, Center in a Row, Bottom, Distribute Horizontally, or Distribute Vertically)
Sizes all selected objects horizontally and vertically to the same size as that of
the largest or smallest object.
Moves the selected object to the front or back.
Moves the selected object one bit or one grid unit up, down, right, or left.
Rotates or flips an object. (90 Degrees Clockwise, 90 Degrees Counterclockwise,
Flip Vertical, Flip Horizontal, Rotate Right 90 Degrees Around Center of
Screen/Frame, Rotate Left 90 Degrees Around Center of Screen/Frame, Flip
Horizontal Around Center of Screen/Frame, or Flip Vertical Around Center of
Screen/Frame)
Edits the shape of a fixed object. (Edits, adds, or deletes nodes.)
Group
Ungroup
Grid
Groups objects.
Ungroups a group of objects.
Sets the grid.
Make Same Size
Order
Nudge
Rotate/Flip
1-20
Section 1 Overview
1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Command
Screen Maintenance
Sheet Maintenance
Validation
Validation Result
Functional Object List
List Up Functional Objects
Used
List Up Addresses Used
Address Cross Reference
Edit Background Bitmap
Register Library
Use Library
Test
Resource Report
Options
Function
Changes the titles of, copies, deletes, or replaces screen page numbers for
screens in a project.
Changes the titles of, copies, deletes, or replaces sheet page numbers for sheets
in a project.
Performs an error check on object settings.
Displays the results of validation.
Displays a list of functional objects on screen with property settings.
Displays the number of times functional objects are used in screens, screen
pages that are not used, and frame pages in a tree format.
Displays a list of addresses that are used.
Displays a list of functional object IDs when addresses are used.
Edits the background.
Registers functional objects in the library and performs maintenance.
Paste functional objects registered in the library.
Performs operating test on the computer without connecting to a PLC.
Displays a report on the resources that have been used.
Sets optional functions.
Window Menu
Command
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
Function
Cascades the screen editing windows.
Tiles the screen editing windows.
Arranges the minimized window icons.
Help Menu
Command
Contents
Search for Help on
How to Use Help
About NT631
Conversion Support Tool
Function
Displays the contents for the online help.
Displays a search dialog box for help topics.
Displays information on using Help.
Displays information on the version of NS-Designer.
1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0
The NS-Designer Version 3.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
Screen data transfer
through PLCs
Switch Box Screen
Multiple language support
Video capture using a PLC
trigger
Enhanced parts List
Reading CLK status
Macro to set time
Screen data can be
transferred using Ethernet
directly the first time
Function
Enables transferring screen data to NS Hardware through a PLC and
transferring ladder program to the PLC through the NS Hardware.
Displays I/O status of addresses on the NS Hardware. Addresses and their
comments can be reused from a ladder program using the Switch Box Utility.
Multiple languages (Simplified Chinese, Korean, Traditional Chinese, etc.) can
be displayed on user screens.
Enables performing video captures using system memory ($SW24) as a trigger.
Vastly increased library objects for use as buttons and lamps.
Displays status of CLK Board attached with NS Hardware on the screen.
Automatically sets the time, which as set manually before.
Screen data can be transferred using Ethernet directly the first time.
1-21
Section 1 Overview
1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0
The NS-Designer Version 4.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
Equipped with USB port as
a standard feature.
Display possible in up to
32,000 colors.
Screen data capacity
greatly increased.
High-speed drawing
Function
Equipped with a USB port as a standard feature enabling display contents to be
printed using USB-compatible general-purpose color printers (e.g., Canon or
Epson printers).
BMP and JPEG images can now be displayed using up to 32,000 colors.
The data capacity has increased from 4 Mbytes to 20Mbytes.
The drawing speed is twice that of existing OMRON products.
1-8 Functions Added in Version 5.0
The NS-Designer Version 5.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
NS5-series models added.
Object forms can be
selected by user.
Windows fonts can be
used in Button and Lamp
objects.
Continuous input can be
received from Bar Code
Reader.
Ver. 1.X projects can be
created and edited.
Function
Added NS5-SQ0o (B) -V1 with compact 5.7-inch STN color display.
The forms of ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, and Word Lamp objects
can now be specified as BMP or JPEG image files.
The labels used in ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, Word Lamp, and
Command Button objects can now be specified using Windows fonts.
Input order of numeric values and character strings can now be controlled,
allowing continuous input from a bar code reader.
NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 can be used to create and edit projects for NS System
Ver. 1.X.
1-9 Functions Added in Version 6.0
The NS-Designer Version 6.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
A PT model added.
Transfer program functions
added.
Data log function
expanded.
Video captures can be
read from the memory
card.
Appearance of command
buttons can be specified.
Temporary input object
added.
The storage format of
numeric values in system
memory can be selected.
Function
Added NS8-TV1¨ (B)-V1.
Screen data can be transferred from a personal computer to the PT via modem.
Installing a CLK board in the personal computer enables screen data to be
transferred. CX-Server compatibility has also simplified settings required for data
transfer.
The number of always logging points has been increased from 5,000 to 50,000
points, and logging data can be automatically saved to the memory card. Saved
CSV files can be read and displayed overlapping the log graph with a reference.
Image data saved in the memory card can be specified from a list and displayed.
The list can be called using the command buttons or from the system menu.
The appearance of command buttons can be specified as round buttons. BMP
and JPEG image files can be specified for button appearance. Write
confirmation messages can also be set.
Objects for temporarily displaying input numerical values or character strings are
provided for use when creating tenkeys or keyboards for Numerical Display &
Input and String Display & Input objects using command buttons. Temporary
input objects can also be used to display maximum and minimum values.
The numerical value storage format for system memory can be selected from
BCD and binary.
1-22
Section 1 Overview
1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Supplement/
Enhancement
The data format for
specifying line numbers in
indirectly specified files for
functional objects can be
selected.
The number of alarms has
been increased.
Macros FOR, NEXT,
CONTINUE, and BREAK
have been added.
Label application function
for importing CSV files has
been added.
System memory functions
have been added.
Function
The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files set using
functional object properties can be selected from BCD and binary.
The maximum number of alarms that can be registered has been increased to
5,000.
Loop processing can be performed using macros. This improves efficiency of
macro creation.
When importing CSV files, the character properties for a specified label name
can be applied to the character properties for another label. This function is
useful when setting multiple labels.
The following flags have been added:
PT battery low flag
PT memory card free space check flag
Memory card power OFF bit
Memory card removing status
Video capture start bit
Video capture executing flag
Video capture results flag
Periodical Data Log Save in process flag
Print screen/video capture switching bit
1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2
The NS-Designer Version 6.2 is supplemented and enhanced by the following main functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
PT models added
Project trigger macro
added
Data block control
functions added to
command buttons
Added items to system
memory
Added arrows
Expanded Alarm/Event
Summary & History
Added program transfer
function
Added installation method
Added startup method
Function
Added NS5-SQ0¨-V2, NS5-TQ0¨-V2, and NS5-MQ0¨-V2.
Setting the macro to execute when the bit or value at a specified address
changes has been enabled.
Data block control functions have been added to command buttons to enable
reading/writing between CSV files and PLC memory, CVS files and PT memory,
and PT memory and PLC memory when a button is pressed or a specified
address turns ON while the command button is displayed.
The following have been added to system memory: data block control complete
flag, internal holding bit/word memory ($HB/$HW) initialization flag, and data
block error number.
Arrow heads can be added to the start and/or end of straight lines.
The titles of each display item can now be displayed on the top line. Also, alarm
messages that are not completely displayed can be touched to display them in a
message box.
Screen data transfer to the PT from a personal computer has been enabled
using a USB cable.
NS-Designer can be installed from the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.
Startup has been enabled by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the CX-Integrator
Network Configuration Window and selecting Start Special Application. If Start
with Settings Inherited is selected, startup through to new project creation will be
automatically executed.
1-23
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 2
Setup, Starting, and Exiting
The NS-Designer software must be installed in the computer when using the NS-Designer for the first time.
The NS-Designer is application software designed to be operated on Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000,
or XP.
Use the following procedure to install, start, and exit the NS-Designer when Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me,
2000, or XP is already installed in the computer.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Before Installing the NS-Designer ...............................................................................................................2-1
Installing the NS-Designer...........................................................................................................................2-2
Starting the NS-Designer ...........................................................................................................................2-14
Exiting the NS-Designer ............................................................................................................................2-15
User Interface.............................................................................................................................................2-16
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer
Before installing the NS-Designer, check that the following requirements have been met.
g Monitor
VGA monitor or better.
Resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or higher is
recommended for optimum use of NSDesigner.
g CD-ROM Drive
Required to install the
NS-Designer.
g Mouse
A mouse that supports
Microsoft Windows.
g Computer
IBM PC/AT or compatible with Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0 (SP6a
or higher), Me, 2000 (SP3 or higher), or XP installed
System Requirements
• CPU
• Recommended memory
• Hard disk
• Internet Explorer
Intel Celeron 400 MHz or better
64 Mbytes or more
200 Mbytes or more available disk space
Version 5.5 or higher
2-1
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
Install the NS-Designer in the hard disk.
To install the NS-Designer, execute the installation program provided.
For details on procedures for installing the NS-Designer from CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package,
refer to the CX-One Setup Manual provided with CX-One.
Cat. No.
W444
Model
[email protected]@C-E
Manual name
CX-One Setup Manual
Contents
Installation and overview of CX-One FA
Integrated Tool Package.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the NS-Designer was previously installed from the CX-One and it’s necessary to install it from the
individual NS-Designer CD-ROM, always uninstall the NS-Designer using the following procedure
before installing it from its individual CD-ROM. The NS-Designer will not operate properly if it is installed without first uninstalling it.
1. Insert the CX-One installation disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select the Modify Option to enable modifying the Support Software that is installed.
3. In the Select Features Dialog Box, clear the selection of only the NS-Designer. Do not change
any other selections.
4. Continue by following the instructions in the dialog boxes to modify the installation and uninstall
NS-Designer.
5. Once the NS-Designer uninstallation process has been completed, place the individual CD-ROM
disk for the NS-Designer into the CD-ROM drive and install the NS-Designer. (See note.)
Note: If the version of the CX-Server bundled on the individual NS-Designer CD-ROM is lower than
the version of the CX-Server bundled with the CX-One, install only the NS-Designer and NOT
the CX-Server. (A message will be displayed if the version is lower.) If a version of CX-Server
that is lower than the version with the CX-One is installed, the CX-One will not operate properly.
2-2-1
Basic Installation Operations
The main buttons that are displayed during installation are as follows:
Confirms the settings in the window displayed and moves to the next window.
Cancels the settings in the window displayed and returns to the previous window.
Closes the window currently being displayed. The settings in the window are cancelled.
Installation can be cancelled by pressing this button in the installation window. A confirmation message
will be displayed.
The actual folder configuration is displayed in a tree format, from which the folders where installation
files are to be installed can be selected.
2-2
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2-2
Installation Procedure
1. Start up Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or XP.
2. Close all applications before executing installation. Place the NS-Designer CD-ROM in the CDROM drive. The setup program is started automatically. If the setup program does not start automatically, such as after executing uninstall, locate Setup.exe in the CD-ROM using Windows Explorer, and then double-click the file to execute the setup program.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If NS-Designer Ver. 2.X, 3.X, 4.X, 5.X, or 6.X is already installed, a dialog box to confirm deletion of
this version will be displayed. Click the OK Button to start deleting this version. To exit the setup
program, click the Cancel Button and then click the Exit Button.
FinsGateway and CX-Server will not be uninstalled by this operation.
3. The NS-Designer Setup Wizard will be displayed.
Install the NS-Designer by following the instructions in the Setup Wizard.
4. During installation, the installation progress is displayed as a percentage.
5. When NS-Designer installation has been completed, a message to confirm installation of Smart
Active Parts will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to start the installation. If Smart Active Parts installation is not required, click the No Button and proceed to step 10.
Smart Active Parts are libraries containing setting/monitoring screens (e.g., Position Control Unit
setting screens and Temperature Controller monitoring screens).
6. The following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Next Button.
2-3
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7. The Setup Type Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the setup type and click the Next Button. If
Complete is selected, proceed to step 9.
8. The dialog box for selecting features will be displayed. Select the Smart Active Parts to be installed
and click the Next Button.
9. During installation, the installation progress is displayed as a percentage. When installation has
been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Finish Button.
10. A message will be displayed to confirm installation of the CX-Server. Click the Yes Button.
11. The following screen for installing the CX-Server will be displayed.
2-4
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
12. Click the Next Button. The screen for specifying the installation destination will be displayed.
13. Click the Next Button. If the following message is displayed, click the OK Button to continue installation.
CX-Server installation followed by installation of CX-Server Driver management tools will begin,
and the installation program will automatically copy the CX-Server and CX-Server Driver management tools files to the specified directory.
14. When installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Select whether or
not to restart the computer immediately, and click the Finish Button to complete the installation.
Always restart the computer before using NS-Designer.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When installing NS-Designer in Windows NT, 2000, or XP, log onto the computer as the administrator to ensure that system DLL files can be overwritten. If overwriting system DLL files fails, NSDesigner may not operate properly.
♦ When adding Smart Active Parts after installation of NS-Designer, double-click the CD-ROM directory \SmartActiveParts\Setup.exe from Windows Explorer to execute the setup program. Select all
the Smart Active Parts to be used in the dialog box for selecting components.
♦ Refer to the How to manage after conversion file in the Programs Folder under the Windows Start
Menu for details after NT31C/NT631C Conversion Support Tool conversion.
♦ Internet Explorer Ver 5.5 or higher is required to transfer data.
2-5
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The folder structure after installation is as follows:
NS-Designer
bldparts
intaparts
BMP files
Parts Collection (bitmaps)
Directory containing manuals
Sample Project Data
Tutorial
Macro
Operation
Setup
Programming
Smart Active Parts
Host Connection
RGB_Video (NS-CA002)
Sample project data for tutorial
Tutorial manual
Macro reference
Operation manual
Setup manual
Programming manual
How to use Smart Active Parts
Manual
Host Connection Manuals (Temp. Controller and Memory Links/Host Links)
NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit Manual
PartsLib
Smart Active Parts
Smart Active Parts Mini
Smart Active Parts for NS8/NS10/NS12
Smart Active Parts for NS5
runparts
System Backup
NS12_V1
V6_2
Ver. 6.2 system program for NS12-V1
V3_x
Ver. 3.x system program for NS12
V6_2
Ver. 6.2 system program for NS10-V1
V3_x
Ver. 3.x system program for NS10
V6_2
Ver. 6.2 system program for NS8-V1
V3_x
Ver. 3.x system program for NS7
V6_2
Ver. 6.2 system program for NS5-V1/V2
NS12
NS10_V1
NS10
NS8_V1
NS7
NS5_V1_V2
RecoverUpdate_6_2
RecoverUpdate_3_x
NT631C_Cnv
Readme_E.txt
Ver. 6.2 recovery/update program
Ver. 3 recovery/update program
Directory containing NT31C/NT613C Conversion Support Tool
Please read. (Contains precautionary information.)
2-6
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2-3
1.
Uninstalling
When uninstalling the NS-Designer or CX-Server, click the Windows Start Button and select Settings - Control Panel.
2. Double-click Add/Remove Applications.
2-7
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Select NS-Designer or CX-Server from the displayed list of applications, and click the
Add/Remove Button.
4. When the NS-Designer has finished being uninstalled, a message will be displayed indicating that
the uninstall operation has been completed. Check the message and then click the OK Button.
2-8
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2-4
Installing USB Drivers for NS-Series PTs.
Install the NS-series USB driver in the personal computer. After installation, data can be transferred
between the personal computer and NS-series PT via USB.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ With NS-V1 Series models, make sure that the PT has a lot number that supports USB transmission. The system program version of the NS-series PT must also support USB transmission. For
details, refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB in the NS series Setup Manual (Cat. No. V083).
Compatible Personal Computers
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP
Operation Procedure
Windows 2000 and Windows XP:
1. Start Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
2. Connect the personal computer to the NS-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable.
The following Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Click the Next Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select Search for the best driver for my device (Recommended). Click the Next Button.
4. Select Specify a location only and then click the Next Button.
2-9
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5. Click the Browse Button, and specify the following file.
NS-Designer installation directory
\USBHostDriver\Win2k_XP\Omron_NS.inf
6. Click the OK Button to display the following dialog box. Click the Next Button to start installing the
USB driver.
7. When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Finish Button.
2-10
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Windows 98 and Windows Me:
1. Start Windows 98 or Windows Me.
2. Connect the personal computer to the NS-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable.
The following Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Click the Next Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select Search for the best driver for your device
(Recommended). Click the Next Button.
4. Select Specify a location only and then click the Browse Button and specify the following file.
NS-Designer installation directory
\USBHostDriver\Win98_Me\NS_DEV.inf
5. Click the Next Button.
2-11
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
6. Click the Next Button to start installation.
When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Finish Button.
7. The Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed again. Click the Next Button.
8. The following dialog box will be displayed. Check that Search for the best driver for your device
(Recommended) is selected, and then click the Next Button.
9. Select Specify a location only and then click the Browse Button and specify the following file.
NS-Designer installation directory
\USBHostDriver\Win98_Me\NS_COM.inf
10. Click the Next Button.
2-12
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11. Click the Next Button to start installation.
When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Finish Button.
2-13
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-3 Starting the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-3 Starting the NS-Designer
To start the NS-Designer, click the Windows Start Button, and then select Programs - Omron – CXOne - NS-Designer - NS-Designer Ver X (The items displayed may vary according to the program
folder specified during installation.), right-click the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window
of CX-Integrator, and select Start Special Application - Start Only.
When the NS-Designer startup is completed, the Main Window will be displayed, as follows:
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ More than one copy of the NS-Designer application can be run at the same time.
♦ To start NS-Designer, log in as the administrator when using a personal computer running Windows NT, 2000, or XP.
2-14
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer
Use one of the following operations to exit the NS-Designer.
• Select Exit from the File Menu.
• Click the Close Button
at the top right of the Main Window.
• Double-click the NS-Designer icon at the top left of the Main Window.
• Click the NS-Designer icon at the top left of the Main Window and select Close from the Control
Menu Box.
• Press the Alt + F4 Keys.
If the project data that is open has not been saved, a confirmation message will be displayed.
When the NS-Designer is exited, the system will return to the Windows screen.
2-15
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-5 User Interface
2-5-1
Basic Screen Functions
The configuration and names and functions of the components in the NS-Designer operation screen
are described here.
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbars
Screen being
created
Status bar
Title Bar
The title bar displays the application name, project name, and screen number.
Menu Bar
Separates the functions into related groups.
Each group name is displayed in the menu bar and the functions are displayed in pull-down menus
under each group name.
Toolbars
Standard Toolbar
This toolbar displays frequently used functions as icons.
Create
New
Project
Save
Project
Open
Project
Open
Screen
Create
New
Screen
Save
Screen
Cut
Paste
Copy
Redo
Undo
2-16
Zoom
About
NS-Designer
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Functional Objects Toolbar
Displays screen creation functions for functional objects as icons. Select the icon button of the functional object to be used in creating the screen to start screen creation.
Bit
Lamp
Word
Button
ON/OFF
Button
Text
Word
Lamp
Command
Button
String Display
& Input
Thumbwheel
Switch
List
Selection
Numeral
Display &
Input
Level
Meter
Analogue
Meters
Broken-line
Graph
Alarm/Event
Data Block
Temporary
Time
Summary &
Table
Input
Table
History
Alarm/Event
Data Log
Frame
Display
Graph
Video Display
Date
Bitmap
Fixed Objects Toolbar
Displays fixed object drawing functions as icons. Select the icon button for the fixed object to be drawn
and start drawing.
Straight
Polygon
Arc
Line
Circle/Oval
Polyline
Sector
Rectangle
Operations Toolbar
Displays frequently used functions from the View and Tools Menus as icons.
Previous
Screen
Show Error Object
Bring to
Front
Show ID
Simulate
ON/OFF
Show Sheet
Object
Show Address
Validation
Register
Result List Up
Library
Addresses
Used
Find
Previous
Label
Previous
Frame Page
Next Screen
Send to
Back
Functional
Object List
Next
Label
Next Frame
Page
Address Cross
Reference
2-17
Use
Library
List Up Functional
Objects Used
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Colors Toolbar
Displays the color settings for functional objects and fixed objects as icons.
Color 1
Copy/Paste
Color 2
Color
Color 3
Color 4
The Copy/Paste Color Button can be used to copy the display color of a functional object or fixed object and paste it into another functional object or fixed object. Therefore, settings can be pasted in a
batch without having to open a separate properties dialog box for every setting.
1. Select the functional object or fixed object with the color to be copied.
2. Click the Copy/Paste Color Button to copy the color and change the appearance of the cursor to
the following.
3. Click over the functional object or fixed object where the color is to be pasted. The Paste
Color/Frame Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
To paste colors to multiple functional objects or fixed objects, select the functional objects or fixed
objects that are going to be edited by enclosing them with the cursor.
4. Select the items to be pasted and click the Paste Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The names of the items displayed as Color 1, Color 2, Color 3, and Color 4 in the Color Toolbar
vary with the selected functional object and object settings.
Examples:Selecting rectangle, 2-light as the button type for ON/OFF Buttons.
Selecting circle/oval (fixed object).
2-18
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Font Properties Toolbar
This toolbar displays the font properties setting functions for text in functional objects as icons.
Copy/Paste
Font
Font Size
Font
Bold
Font Color
Align
Left
Italic
Align
Right
Center
in a
Row
Center in Align Align
a Column Top Bottom
The Copy/Paste Font Properties Button can be used to copy the text properties set for a functional
object and paste them into another functional object. Therefore, settings can be pasted in a batch
without having to open a separate properties dialog box for every setting.
1. Select the functional object with the text properties to be copied.
2. Select the Copy/Paste Font Properties Button to change the appearance of the cursor to the following.
3. Click over the functional object where the text attributes are to be pasted. The Paste Text Attribute
Dialog Box will be displayed.
To paste text attributes to multiple functional objects, select the functional objects that are going to
be edited by enclosing them with the cursor, as shown below.
4. Select the items to be pasted and click the Paste Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When raster fonts (font names: fine, standard, and rough) are selected, the bold and italic styles in
the toolbar cannot be used.
Refer to Text Attributes under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions in the NS Series Programming Manual for details.
2-19
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Address Toolbar
Displays the setting functions for the addresses of the functional objects in a toolbar. Select the functional object for which the address is to be set and set the address.
Using this toolbar, address settings can be edited and changed without having to open a properties
dialog box for the settings.
Displays the set address.
Displays the address type.
When a functional object
has multiple address
settings, select the address
type from the combo box
and then set each address.
Clicking this button displays the
Address Setting Dialog Box from
which the address can be set.
Selections for ON/OFF Buttons
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Another method for setting addresses apart from directly inputting from the keyboard, is to input the
address from the Address Settings Dialog Box that is displayed by clicking the Settings Button.
Refer to 5-7 Address Settings for details.
Screen Creation Screens
These screens are used to create the screens displayed on the PT.
Status Bar
The status bar displays an explanation of the function or object where the cursor is positioned or which
is selected.
Displays information
on the function of the
toolbar icon or menu
item selected.
Displays the frame
page number
currently selected.
Displays the current
coordinates of the
cursor.
Displays the object
name currently
selected.
Displays the
switch label name
currently selected.
Displays the upper left
coordinates of the object.
2-20
Displays the
selected NSDesigner system
i
Displays the PT
model currently
selected
Displays the
current zoom
status.
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The toolbars and status bar can be set to be shown or hidden.
Toolbar: Select View - Toolbars and then Standard, Functional Object, Fixed Object, Operation, Formatting, Color, or Address.
Status Bar: 1. Select View - Status Bar.
A check symbol
before an item indicates that the item is displayed.
♦ The toolbars can be moved to any position on the screen.
Please the cursor on any part
other than a button, and drag the
toolbars to the desired location.
2-5-2
Dialog Box Main Functions
Dialog boxes are used to set detailed settings for executing PT functions.
Edit Box
Enter the character string. If there is a spin button , click the Up Arrow
Button to increase or decrease numerical values.
Button or Down Arrow
Option Buttons
Item names with a circle to their left are optional items.
From the multiple optional items, only one item can be selected. The selected item will be indicated by
a black dot.
2-21
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Combo Box
A list of multiple optional items will be displayed in a drop-down menu. Select the items to be set from
the list.
List View
Select the item from the list.
Check Boxes
Item names with a square on their left side are the optional items.
Select whether or not to enable the item. The selected items are indicated with a check mark.
2-22
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 3
Manipulating Project Files
This section describes the basic operations for manipulating projects where data created for screens is stored.
3-1 Projects ........................................................................................................................................................3-1
3-2 Creating New Projects .................................................................................................................................3-2
3-3 Opening Existing Projects............................................................................................................................3-3
3-4 Saving Projects ............................................................................................................................................3-5
3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name....................................................................................................3-7
3-6 Opening Recent Projects..............................................................................................................................3-8
3-7 Opening Template Projects..........................................................................................................................3-9
3-8 Project Maintenance...................................................................................................................................3-12
3-9 Project Properties.......................................................................................................................................3-17
3-10 Changing the PT Model .............................................................................................................................3-21
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-1 Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-1 Projects
The NS-Designer designates and handles PT screen data as one project. A project consists of data
that can be broadly divided into project folders where files such as bitmap files and project files (extension.ipp) are stored.
Sample
pnlpg###.ipw(### = 000-F9F)
pnlpg###.ipw(### = FFF-FF6)
unitcom.txt
message.jpm
pnlalarm.alm
datalog.cfg
datalog.cfg
omron.hst
Screen file
Sheet file
Unit and scale setting file
Write confirmation message file
Alarm/event setting file
Data log setting file
Host setting file
*.bmp*1, *.jpg*1
*.csv
*.bmp*1,
*.ini*1 *.jpg*1
*.txt*1
Bitmaps and JPEG files for displaying background and bitmap objects
*.lst*1
*.vec
print.cfg*2
errlist.txt*3
*.csv*2
log
*.log*2
sample.ipp
Data block data files
Communications conditions setting file
Text files for displaying text objects and indirectly specifying
character strings
Text files for list selection object display and storing character
strings
Figure specification graphic data files
Print setting files
Validation result files
Logging files
Internal logging files
Project files
Note 1. The user can edit these files with a text editor. The other files are created by NS-Designer and must not
be edited using a text editor or other means.
2. These files are created when printing or executing a test and are not transferred when transferring data
to the PT.
3. These files are created when validating and are not transferred when transferring data to the PT.
When files are saved under the name Sample, a file named Sample.IPP will be created in a folder
called Sample under \Temp\ in the NS-Designer install directory. To open an existing project, select the
file with the IPP extension.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ To move or copy the project data to a floppy disk or other storage area, select both the folder and
project file, and execute the operation. The project consists of these two data types and cannot be
opened if only one of them is selected.
3-1
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-2 Creating New Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-2 Creating New Projects
The procedures for operations from creating new projects to opening screens are described here.
1. Select File - New Project or click the New Project Button in the toolbar.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Projects that were created with NS-Designer Ver. 2.0 or later cannot be run on PTs using system
Ver. 1.X. Install NS-Designer Ver. 1.X to create projects. Projects for system Ver. 1.X can be created or edited, however, when using NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 or later.
2. The New Project Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the NS-series PT model and System Version
and click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The project system versions that can be run depend on the system program version installed in the
PT. Refer to Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products for
details.
♦ The NS-Designer can also be started by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window of the CX-Integrator and selecting Start Special Application - Start with Settings Inherited.
3. The New Screen Dialog Box will be displayed. Select New Screen or Reuse Existing Screen and
click the OK Button. Refer to Creating New Screens under 4-2 Creating and Saving Screens for
details.
4. Screen creation starts after new screen is opened.
3-2
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-3 Opening Existing Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-3 Opening Existing Projects
Opening From the File Menu
1. Select File - Open Project or click the Open Project Button in the toolbar.
2. The Select Project Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the project file (IPP extension) and click the Open Button.
Opening by Double-clicking an IPP File
1. Double-click on an IPP file from Windows Explorer to display the Open Screen Dialog Box.
2. Click the OK Button.
3-3
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-3 Opening Existing Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Screen data that was edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 2.X can be converted using the NSDesigner’s Settings Menu. The procedure for converting to NS-Designer Ver. 6.X screen data is
given below.
1. Open the NS-Designer Ver. 2.X data in NS-Designer Ver. 6.X.
2. Select Settings – Conversion – Project – To Ver6.2. This will convert the data to NS-Designer
Ver. 6.2 data.
∗
Converting screen data for the NS7 to NS-Designer Ver. 6 or higher data will convert it as data
for the [email protected]
∗
Depending on the combination of system program, NS-Designer version, and data version, it
may not be possible to use converted data. Refer to Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products.
∗
NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 or later can also convert screen data created with NS-Designer Ver. 1.X.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Project data created with NS-Designer from Ver. 1.X to Ver. 5.X can be edited and saved on NSDesigner Ver. 6.X.
If project data that was edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 1.0 is opened with NS-Designer Ver.
6.X, the following data conversion confirmation message, which indicates making a copy of the
data for Ver. 1.1 will be displayed.
If the Yes Button is clicked, the following dialog box will be displayed and the data will be resaved
as Ver. 1.1 data under the specified project name.
If the No Button is clicked, the project will not be read or converted.
3-4
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-4 Saving Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-4 Saving Projects
The methods for saving project files are described here.
1. Select File - Save Project or click the Save Project Button in the toolbar.
New Projects
Newly created projects and screens are temporarily created in a temporary directory until saved.
The temporary directory and temporary files are as follows:
(NS-Designer install directory)\TEMP\untitled.ipp
When a project or screen is saved for the first time, the following dialog box will be displayed and the
project will be saved (copied from the TEMP directory). Specify the folder and file name where the
project will be saved, and click the Save Button.
Always observe the following precautions when specifying the project name.
• The project name must be no more than 42 characters including the IPP extension.
• Select a name using alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar symbols ($), and periods (.).
If the project name is specified using other characters, symbols, or marks, an error will occur when the
Save Button is clicked.
3-5
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-4 Saving Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If a project is changed but has not yet been saved, a dialog box confirming whether or not
to save the changes will be displayed when the project is closed.
♦ When saving new projects, if the specified saving location contains an existing project, the existing
project’s data will be deleted and overwritten with the new project data.
♦ The setting for whether or not the screen is a pop-up screen is saved in the project file (*.IPP).
Therefore, even if the screen properties are set to pop-up screen, the screen will operate as a base
screen when the PT is operating if the project has not been saved.
After changing the setting from base screen to pop-up screen, the relationship between whether the
project or screen is saved and the operations at the PT is as follows:
Save project
Save screen
Operations at the PT
Yes
Yes
Operates as a pop-up screen.
Yes
No
Operates as a pop-up screen.
(The screen size used is that set for the most recently
saved screen.)
No
Yes
Operates as a base screen.
Yes: Saves; No: Does not save
3-6
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name
1. Select File - Save Project As.
2. The Save Project As Dialog Box will be displayed.
Specify the directory and file name where the project will be saved, and click the Save Button.
Always observe the following precautions when specifying the project name.
• The project name must be no more than 42 characters including the IPP extension.
• Select a name using alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar symbols ($), and periods (.).
If the project name is specified using other characters, symbols, or marks, an error will occur when
data is transferred to the PT.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When the project name is changed and saved, all the original project data will also be copied to the
new project directory.
♦ When specifying the project name, if the specified save destination has an existing project, the existing project’s data will be deleted and overwritten with the currently open project data.
3-7
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-6 Opening Recent Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-6 Opening Recent Projects
Up to the four most recently used projects can be opened directly from a menu.
1. Select File - Recent Projects.
2. The recently used project names are displayed with the directory path.
Select any project from the list.
The four most recent projects are displayed
beginning with the most recent
N
Noottee
♦ If a project edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 1.0 is opened with NS-Designer Ver. 6.2, the
following message, confirming data conversion, will be displayed.
Refer to 3-3 Opening Existing Projects for details.
3-8
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-7 Opening Template Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-7 Opening Template Projects
By specifying a template project, screens that are saved in specific projects can always be reused
when creating new screens. This is a useful, for example, for reusing screens from a particular project
many times, or for collecting frequently used screens in a specific project and using them as a group
screen format when creating projects. The workflow when specifying a template project is given in the
following flowchart.
1. Specify the template project
2. Create a new screen.
3. Display Select Template
Dialog Box
Reusing screen from
template project
4. (a) Select the screen to be
reused.
Not reusing screen from
template project
4. (b) Use standard screen
creation procedures.
5. Edit and save screen.
3-9
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-7 Opening Template Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-7-1
Specifying Template Projects (Flowchart Step 1)
1. Select File – Select Template Project.
2. The Select Project Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the project to be specified as a template
project and click the Open Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When changing template projects, specify the project again by selecting File – Select Template
Project.
3-7-2
Reusing Screens (Flowchart Steps 2 to 4)
1. The Select Template Dialog Box will be displayed each time a new screen is created. (Flowchart
steps 2 and 3)
Select the screen to be reused. (Flowchart step 4 (a))
When not reusing the screen, click the Cancel Button to return to the standard procedure for creating a new screen. (Flowchart step 4 (b))
2. Click the OK Button.
3. The selected screen will be reused as the new screen.
3-10
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-7 Opening Template Projects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-7-3
Canceling Template Projects
When a template project is cancelled, the Select Template Dialog Box is not displayed for creating a
new screen, and the standard procedure is resumed.
(Procedure follows flowchart steps 2, 4(b), and 5.)
Click the Cancel Template Button in the Select Template Dialog Box.
3-11
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-8 Project Maintenance
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-8 Project Maintenance
Project maintenance includes functions to copy, delete, back up, and restore projects. The following
maintenance functions can be performed.
Item
Duplicate
Delete
Backup
Restore
3-8-1
Details
Copies the specified project.
Deletes the specified project.
Backs up the specified project (specify floppy disk or folder).
Restores the backed up project data.
Procedures
The operating methods common for each setting item are explained below.
1. Select File – Project Maintenance.
2. A dialog box will be displayed confirming whether to close the screen being edited. Click the Yes
Button.
3. The Project Maintenance Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the desired tab.
4. Make the settings and then click the Execute Button.
3-12
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-8 Project Maintenance
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Copy
1. Select the Duplicate Tab.
2. Set the source project and destination project.
1
2
No.
1
2
Item
Source Project
Destination
Project
Details
Set the source project file name to be copied as a full path name. When the NSDesigner is used to open the project, the project file will be displayed automatically.
Set the destination project file name to be copied as a full path name.
3. Click the Execute Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the Yes Button to copy the
project.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ An existing project file can be specified as the project destination, but all the data in the previous
existing project file will be deleted. (The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.)
If the same project is specified as the source project and destination project, the data will be deleted before it is copied, so the data will be lost. Do NOT set the same project for the copy source
and destination.
3-13
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-8 Project Maintenance
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Delete
1. Select the Delete Tab.
2. Sets the project to be deleted.
1
No.
1
Item
Delete Project
Details
Set the name of the project file to be deleted as a full path name.
3. Click the Execute Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the Yes Button to delete the
project.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Projects being edited cannot be deleted. Close the project first, and then retry the operation.
♦ Projects that have been deleted cannot be restored. Check the project carefully before deleting it.
Backup
1. Select the Backup Tab.
2. Set the project to be backed up.
1
2
No.
1
2
Item
Backup
Project
Backup To
Details
Sets the name of the project file to be backed up as a full path name. When the NSDesigner is used to open the project, the project file is displayed automatically.
When a floppy disk is selected, the backup file will be saved on the floppy disk. Prepare
the specified number of 1.44-Mbyte floppy disks. When a folder is selected, the backup file
will be saved in the folder. A file is created at the backup destination under the name
[project name].XXX (XXX = 000, 001, …).
3-14
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-8 Project Maintenance
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Click the Execute Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the Yes Button to back up
the project.
4. When the backup destination is the floppy disk, the number of floppy disks required will be displayed. When more than one floppy disk is required, switch the floppy disks according to the messages displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the same backup file of the project already exists in the backup destination, the previously existing backup file will be deleted and a new backup file will be created.
Restore
1. Select the Restore Tab.
2. Set the project to be restored.
1
2
No.
1
2
Item
Restore
Source
Restore
Destination
Details
When floppy disk is selected, the backup file stored in the floppy disk will be restored.
When folder is selected, the backup file stored on the hard disk will be restored.
Sets the name of the project file to be restored as a full path name.
Specify the name of the project file with the same name as that of the backup file. Example: If the backup file is TEST.000, then specify the project name as TEST.IPP (any path
can be specified).
3. Click the Execute Button to display the confirmation dialog box. Click the Yes Button to restore the
project.
4. When floppy disk is set as the restore source, switch the floppy disks according to the messages
displayed.
3-15
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-8 Project Maintenance
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ An existing project file can be specified as the restore destination, but the data in the existing project file will be deleted. The alarm/event data, however, will not be deleted. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
♦ An error will occur if no project with the same name as the backup file exists in the restore destination. If this error occurs, create a project file with the same name as the backup file, and then restore the project.
3-16
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-9 Project Properties
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-9 Project Properties
Properties can be set for projects. The following items can be set.
Item
Title
Switch Label
Macro
Select Language
Pop-up Menu
Macro Option
Numeral Input Option
Input Status Color
Data Format
3-9-1
Details
Set the project title (up to 64 characters).
Set the number of labels (1 to 16) and the label names (up to 15 characters).
Register the macros to be used for the project.
Select the system language to be used for the PT display.
Set pop-up menus using word buttons, command buttons, and String Display & Input.
Set whether “\n” that is included in the character string when using message box
macros (MSGBOX) is to be handled as a line-feed code.
Set either to display present values or delete the current string and input a new string
in the display column when performing numerical input for Numerical Display & Input
objects.
Set the display color for text and background in the input field when inputting Numerical Display & Input objects, String Display & Input objects, and Temporary Input
objects.
Set the data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files.
Procedure
The operating methods common for each project property setting item are explained below.
1. Select Settings - Project properties.
2. The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
The settings method for each setting item is explained next.
Title
Select the Title Tab.
Set a title of up to 64 characters.
Switch Label
1. Select the Switch Label Tab.
2. Make the switch label settings.
3-17
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-9 Project Properties
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1
2
3
4
No.
1
2
3
4
Item
No. of Labels
Switch No.
Label Name
Initial Label
Details
Set how many labels can be switched (1 to 16).
Set the label number to be switched.
Set a label name of up to 15 characters.
Set the label number shown on the screen after the power to the PT is turned ON.
The default setting is 0.
Macro
1. Select the Macro Tab.
2. Register the macros to be used for the project. Refer to 6-1 Registering Macros for details on how
to set macros.
Select Language
1. Select the Select Language Tab.
2. Select the system language to be used for the PT display. “System language” is the language used
for PT display characters, such as in system menus, keypads, and dialog boxes.
3-18
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-9 Project Properties
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the character display format is set to ASCII code for string display and input, restore display, and
data block tables (character string fields), the characters used for PT display are determined by the
following character codes, according to the system language.
System language
Character display
Japanese
Shift JIS code
English
Latin 1 code
Example (character code: B5)
µ
If the character strings for label objects are indirectly specified, these characters will also be determined in the way shown in the table.
Pop-up Menu
1. Click the Pop-up Menu Tab.
2. Make the settings for the pop-up menu used for setting Word Button, Command Button, and String
Display & Input objects.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
2
3
4
Item
Text Color
Background Color
Font Size
Show Delimiter
Details
Set the text color used in the pop-up menu.
Set the background color of the pop-up menu.
Set the font size used in the pop-up menu.
Select to display lines separating items in the pop-up menu.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The settings made on the Pop-up Menu Tab Page are not applied by the Test Tool in the NSDesigner. To check the results of settings made on the Pop-up Menu Tab Page, transfer the project
to the PT and check operation on the PT.
3-19
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-9 Project Properties
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Macro Option
1. Click the Macro Option Tab.
2. Select to display messages over multiple lines by handling the “\n” in the character string as a linefeed code when using the message box macro (MSGBOX).
Numeral Input
1. Click the Numeral Input Options Tab.
2. Set either to display or delete present values when inputting numerical values in Numerical Display
& Input objects.
Input Status Color
1. Click the Input Status Color Tab.
2. Set the Text and background colors used in the input field when inputting numerical values or
character strings for Numerical Display & Input objects, String Display & Input objects, and Temporary Input objects.
3-20
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-10 Changing the PT Model
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Data Format
1. Click the Data Format Tab.
2. Set the data format to BCD or binary for specifying the line numbers in indirectly specified files.
3-10 Changing the PT Model
This function changes the model of the NS-series PT that supports the project.
1. Select Settings – Conversion - Change PT Model.
The PT Model Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the PT model to be changed, and then click the OK Button.
3. A message to confirm the model change will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to change the
model.
3-21
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
3-10 Changing the PT Model
NS-Designer Operation Manual
When the PT model is changed, the screen size will change as follows:
Model before
changing
NS12
Model after
changing
NS10
NS8
NS10
Converts the basic screen size to 640 × 480 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 640 × 480 dots are converted to 640 ×
480 dots.
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
Converts the basic screen size to 320 × 240 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 320 × 240 dots are converted to 320 ×
240 dots.
NS12
Converts the basic screen size to 800 × 600 dots.
No conversion.
NS8
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
NS8
Screen size conversion
NS12
NS10
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
Converts the basic screen size to 320 × 240 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 320 × 240 dots are converted to 320 ×
240 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 800 × 600 dots.
No conversion.
Converts the basic screen size to 320 × 240 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 320 × 240 dots are converted to 320 ×
240 dots.
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS12
Converts the basic screen size to 800 × 600 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 640 × 480 dots.
NS5-MQ
NS10
NS8
NS12
NS10
NS8
Converts the basic screen size to 800 × 600 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 640 × 480 dots.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When the model has been changed from the NS12, NS10, or NS5 to the NS8 (or, conversely, from
the NS8 to the NS12, NS10, or NS5), the size of the intervals in the touch-sensitive mesh are different, so it may not be possible to press some of the functional objects. After conversion, always
check that the functional objects are above the touch-sensitive mesh size by running validation
from the Tools Menu. Refer to Section 9 Validation for details on the validation function.
♦ Although screen data for the [email protected] is displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels on
the NS-Designer displays and the [email protected] screen, the data will be displayed in color if it is
converted to data for a PT model with color displays on the NS-Designer or transferred to a PT with
a color display screen. The color codes that are used when creating the screen data for the [email protected] will be displayed for screen data and the image colors will be used for BMP and JPEG
data.
♦ All screen data created for PTs with color displays will be displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale
levels if the screen data is converted for the [email protected] on the NS-Designer or it is transferred
to the [email protected]
3-22
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 4
Screen Types and Operations
This section describes the basic operations for the screens that can be displayed on the PT.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
Basic Operations ..........................................................................................................................................4-1
Creating and Saving Screens......................................................................................................................4-18
Sheets .........................................................................................................................................................4-24
Frames........................................................................................................................................................4-28
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
The operating methods common to each screen are explained here.
4-1-1
Setting Screen Properties
Set the properties for the screen currently being edited. The following items can be set using this function.
Item
Title
Size/Pop-up
Background/Others
Macro
Detail setting
Details
Set the title of the edited screen (up to 64 characters).
Set the types of edit screen (base screen or pop-up screen) and screen size.
Set the screen background and data file compression settings.
Register the macros to be set for the screen.
Set the macro execution timing for the SAP (Smart Active Parts) library. For details,
refer to How to use Smart Active Parts (PDF) included with the NS-Designer.
Procedure
The operating methods common for each setting item are explained here.
1. Select Settings - Screen Properties.
2. The Screen Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
The settings method for each setting item is explained here.
Screen Title
1. Select the Title Tab.
2. Set a title of up to 64 characters.
4-1
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Size/Pop-up
1. Select the Size/Pop-up Tab.
2. Set the screen size and pop-up screen setting.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
2
Item
Screen Size
Use as Default
Screen Size
Use as Pop-up
Screen
3
Pop-up Screen
Display Position
4
Pop-up Screen
Setting
Details
Set the PT screen display size.
The maximum screen size that can be set depends on the PT model selected.
NS12:
Up to 796 dots horizontal × 566 dots vertical with title bar.
Up to 796 dots horizontal × 596 dots vertical without title bar.
NS10, NS8: Up to 636 dots horizontal × 446 dots vertical with title bar.
Up to 636 dots horizontal × 476 dots vertical without title bar.
NS5:
Up to 316 dots horizontal × 206 dots vertical with title bar.
Up to 316 dots horizontal × 236 dots vertical without title bar.
Select this item to set the size as the default the next time a new screen is created.
Select this item to use the screen as a pop-up screen when the PT is running.
When not selected, the screen is used as a base screen.
Screen number 0 cannot be set as a pop-up screen.
Settings of other screens can be changed freely.
Set the position where the pop-up screen is displayed while the PT is running.
Select the position from one of the following settings.
Center of Screen, Top Left of Screen, Bottom Left of Screen, Top Right of
Screen, Bottom Right of Screen, or Any Position. When Any Position is selected, specify the X and Y coordinates for the top left of the pop-up screen.
Set the settings related to the pop-up screen.
Each of the setting items is as follows: Select each item to enable the setting.
Enable input on other screens
Closes when base screen switches
No title bar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If No title bar is selected under Pop-up Screen Setting, the screen’s frame will not be displayed
when the screen is displayed on the PT.
Title bar and frame displayed
No title bar or frame displayed
♦ If Any Position is selected under Pop-up Screen Display Position and the values input for the
screen coordinates are out of range, the pop-up screen will be displayed as a full screen.
4-2
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Background/Others
1. Select the Background/Others Tab.
2. Set the screen background and data file compression settings.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
2
Item
Background Color
Set Color
Use as Default
Background Color
Background File
Select File Name
Select
Edit
3
4
Compress Screen
Data File
The order of display
Display all objects
at once.
(Recommended)
Display frames
and fixed objects
first.
Details
Select the screen’s background color from 256 options.
Click the Set Color Button to display the Color Setting Dialog Box. Select the
background color from the dialog box.
Select this item to set the background color as the default next time a new
screen is created.
Specify the background file.
Select to specify an image file as the screen background. The following files
can be specified.
Specify a file name as a character string of up to 12 characters (up to 8 characters for the file name and 3 characters for the extension). The following
characters can be used for file names:
Alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar sign ($), and period (.)
BMP and JPEG file formats are supported.
Click the Select Button to open the File Dialog Box. Select the file from the
dialog box.
Click the Edit Button to start the image editor and allow the background to be
edited. Specify the image editor to be started up in the Editor Tab Page of the
Options Dialog Box (Tools - Options).
Select this item to save the screen data file in compressed format.
Select this item to display all objects at once after getting information that is
necessary to display the objects.
Select this item to display frames and fixed objects first and then display all of
the other objects after getting the necessary information.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Bitmap files (BMP or JPEG) that conform to Microsoft Windows standards can be set for the background.
♦ Specify which application to start up as the image editor under Tools - Options.
4-3
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Macro
1. Select the Macro Tab.
2. Register the macros to be used for the screen. Refer to 6-1 Registering Macros for details on how
to register macros.
4-1-2
Grid Setting
The formation of squares set at equal intervals on the screen is called the grid.
This function sets whether to show or hide the grid and the size of the grid interval.
1. Select Layout - Grid to display the Set Grid Dialog Box.
1
2
3
4
`
`
No.
1
Item
Display Grid
2
Snap to Grid
3
4
Grid Size
Check when grid is
not clear
Details
Select this item to display the grid lines. The grid serves as a guide for arranging
the functional objects.
Select this item to enable the grid. Enabling the grid allows functional objects to
be snapped to the grid when moving them.
Specify the width and height of the grid intervals in dot units.
Select this item to reverse the color of the grid line. Use this setting if the grid
lines are not clear because they are a similar color to the background.
4-4
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1-3
Switching Items Displayed for Objects
The methods for switching the display type on the screen and confirming object settings are described
here.
Simulate ON/OFF
This function can be used to display the form of a functional object on the current screen when the
status of the address is ON. (The default is OFF.)
OFF Status
ON Status
`
Select View - Simulate ON/OFF or click the Simulate ON/OFF Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The
symbol before the Simulate ON/OFF Menu item indicates that simulate ON status is currently displayed.
♦ To return to simulate OFF status, select View - Simulate ON/OFF or click the Simulate ON/OFF
Button in the toolbar again.
4-5
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Show ID
This function displays the ID numbers assigned to objects, except those assigned to tables.
ID numbers are assigned to objects automatically in the order that the objects are created.
Show ID
Select View - Show ID or click the Show ID Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The
symbol before the Show ID Menu item indicates that the ID numbers are currently displayed.
♦ To return to the normal display, select View - Show ID or click the Show ID Button in the toolbar
again.
♦ The ID numbers can be displayed in a small font. The procedure is as follows:
1. Select Tools - Options.
2. Select the Edit/Disp. Tab.
3. Select Use small font for ID display.
♦ When an object is deleted causing a break in the sequence of ID numbers, the missed ID number
will be allocated to the object that is created next.
♦ When a table is created, ID numbers are assigned to the table itself as well as to the functional objects contained in it. When the ID numbers are displayed, however, the ID numbers of the functional objects in the table will be displayed without showing the table ID number.
4-6
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Functional Object IDs
A functional object ID consists of the object type and four-digit numerals.
Type
Buttons
Lamps
Displays &
Inputs
Displays
Alarm
System Clock
Data Log
Data Block
Others
Functional object
ON/OFF Buttons
Word Buttons
Command Buttons
Bit Lamps
Word Lamps
Numeral Displays & Inputs
String Displays & Inputs
Thumbwheel Switches
Temporary Inputs
Text
List Selection
Level Meter
Bitmap
Analogue Meter
Broken-line Graph
Video Display
Alarm Display
Alarm/Event Summary History
Date
Time
Data Log Graph
Data Block Table
Frame
Table
ID
PB0000 to PB1023
PBW0000 to PBW1023
PBC0000 to PBC1023
PL0000 to PL1023
PLW0000 to PLW1023
NUM0000 to NUM1023
STR0000 to STR1023
THW0000 to THW1023
TMP0000 to TMP1023
LBL0000 to LBL1023
LST0000 to LST1023
LEV0000 to LEV1023
BMP0000 to BMP1023
ANA0000 to ANA1023
BLG0000 to BLG1023
VDO0000 to VDO1023
ALM0000 to ALM1023
ALS0000 to ALS1023
DAT0000 to DAT1023
TIM0000 to TIM1023
DLOG0000 to DLOG1023
DTBL0000 to DTBL1023
FRM0000 to FRM1023
TBL0000 to TBL1023
Fixed Object IDs
Fixed object IDs are displayed as 4-digit numerals.
0000 to 1023
Show Address
This function displays the address set for each functional object.
Normal Display
Address Display
Select View - Show Address or click the Show Address Button in the toolbar.
4-7
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The
symbol before the Show Address Menu item indicates that the addresses are currently being displayed.
♦ To return to the normal display, select View - Show Address or click the Show Address Button in
the toolbar again.
♦ The addresses displayed with this function contain the data set in the General Tab Page of the
Object Properties Dialog Box for the functional objects.
♦ Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.
4-8
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The following information is displayed in each functional object when Show Address is selected.
Type
Button
Functional object
ON/OFF Button
Display information
The write address, display address 1, and display address 2 are displayed in
the following format.
$B100(W)
$B101(R1)
$B102(R2)
(W: Write address; R1: Display address 1; R2: Display address 2)
Word Button
The write address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
Command Button
Switch
Screen
The set values are displayed in the following format.
• Specified screen
50(P)
$W100(W)
(P: Page number; W: Page write address)
• Indirectly specified screen
$W10(P)
$W100(W)
(P: Indirect reference address; W: Page write address)
• Selection by Pop-up Menu
POPUP
(POPUP is the fixed display.)
Button
Command Button
Switch
Screen
• Forward
PAGE+
$W100(W)
(PAGE+ is the fixed display; W: Page write address)
• Backward
PAGE−
$W100(W)
(PAGE− is the fixed display; W: Page write address)
Key Button
KEYBUTTON
(KEYBUTTON is the fixed display.)
Control
Pop-up
Screen
PCTRL
(PCTRL is the fixed display.)
Display
System
Menu
SYSMENU
(SYSMENU is the fixed display.)
4-9
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Type
Button
Functional object
Command Button
Stop
Buzzer
Display information
BUZZER
(BUZZER is the fixed display.)
None
NOP
(NOP is the fixed display.)
Video
Capture
Capture
(Capture is the fixed display.)
Contrast
Adjustment
Contrast + 10
(The following function names and set values are displayed.)
- Contrast
- Brightness
- Depth
- Tone
Vision
Sensor
Console
Output
ESC
(The signal name is displayed.)
Data Block
Control
-FILE-PLC
File -> PLC
(The following control information is displayed.)
- File -> PLC
- PLC -> File
- Record Delete
Data Block
Control
-FILE-NS, NS-PLC
File -> NS
(The following control information is displayed.)
- File -> NS
- NS -> File
- NS -> PLC
- PLC -> NS
4-10
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Type
Functional object
Command Button
Data Block
Control
–Read
Record
Label
Display information
Record Label
(Record Label is the fixed display)
Lamp
Bit Lamp
The address is displayed in the following format.
$B100
Word Lamp
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
Display
& Input
Numeral Display &
Input
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
String Display &
Input
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
4-11
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Type
Display
& Input
Functional object
Thumbwheel
Switch
Display information
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
Temporary Input
The product name is displayed in the following format.
TEMPORARY
Display
List Selection
The set value is displayed in the following format.
• Internal Memory ($W)
$W100
• File
LIST.lst
Level Meter
Analogue Meter
Bitmap
The border information is displayed in the following format.
$W120(M)
1000(X)
$W100(0A)
$W101(1A)
0(N)
(M:
Monitor address)
(X:
Max. fixed value)
(O:
Border 1-2 fixed value)
(1:
Border 2-3 fixed value)
(N:
Min. fixed value)
(XA: Max. indirect address)
(0A: Border 1-2 indirect address)
(1A: Border 2-3 indirect address)
(NA: Min. indirect address)
The file is displayed in the following format.
ERR.bmp
4-12
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Show Error Object
Objects for which errors were detected in validation are displayed with red borders. Refer to Section 9
Validation for details on the validation function.
Example:
Validation items
Overlapping of functional objects
Functional objects created inside screen/frame area
Select View - Show Error Object or click the Show Error Object Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The
symbol before the Show Error Object Menu item indicates that the error objects are currently displayed.
♦ To return to the normal display, select View - Show Error Object or click the Show Error Object
Button in the toolbar again.
Show Sheet Object
This function is used to display the applicable sheet object.
The sheet object is displayed by default.
Sheet Objects Not Displayed
Sheet Objects Displayed
Select View - Show Sheet Object or click the Show Sheet Object Button in the toolbar.
4-13
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The
symbol before the Show Sheet Object Menu item indicates that the sheet objects are currently displayed.
♦ To hide the sheet object, select View - Show Sheet Object or click the Show Sheet Object Button
in the toolbar again.
♦ Refer to 4-3 Sheets for details on basic sheet operations.
4-1-4
Changing the Display
The methods for changing the display on the screen are explained here.
Displaying Screens
The methods for switching the display of screen windows are as follows:
Cascade (Window - Cascade)
Cascades the open windows on the screen with the active window on top.
Tile (Window - Tile)
Tiles the open windows.
Arrange Icons (Window - Arrange Icons)
Arranges minimized windows.
The minimized windows are arranged from left to right at the bottom of the application window. (This
command cannot be used if there are no minimized windows.)
Previous Screen
Displays the screen of the previous screen page number.
Select View - Previous Screen or click the Previous Screen Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Next Screen
Displays the screen of the next screen page number.
Select View - Next Screen or click the Next Screen Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
4-14
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1-5
Switch Label
This function is used to switch labels when multiple labels are registered.
Switching Labels Backward and Forward
Switch labels by selecting Previous Label or Next Label from the toolbar.
Toolbar
Switching to Any Label
1. Select View - Switch Label.
The Switch Label Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the label to be displayed and then click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Refer to 3-9 Project Properties for details on setting multiple labels.
4-15
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1-6
Show Touch Points
This function is used to display the points where the PT touch points are positioned in the screen. Use
this function to check that the functional objects are arranged above touch points.
Select View - Show Touch Points.
Note
Touch input will not be recognized if the functional objects are not created above the
touch points. Therefore, always arrange the functional objects above the touch points.
Refer to Arranging Functional Objects under 5-1 Creating Functional Objects for details.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The
symbol before the Show Touch Points Menu item indicates that the touch points are currently displayed.
♦ To return to the normal display, select View - Show Touch Points again.
4-1-7
Zoom
Zooms the screen display up and down.
Use the Zoom Dialog Box to specify the magnification between 25% and 800%. Select Fit to zoom the
display up or down to fit the current window size.
1. Select View - Zoom.
The Zoom Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the magnification and then click the OK Button.
4-16
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-1 Basic Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Using Fit
The same horizontal and vertical
magnification are used full screen.
4-1-8
Refreshing
Refresh the screen to delete garbage on the screen and correct distortion in the display.
Select View - Refresh.
4-17
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
The basic screen operations are explained here.
4-2-1
Creating New Screens
Select File - New Screen or click the New Screen Button in the toolbar.
The New Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When a new project is created, the New Screen Dialog Box is displayed after the PT model has
been selected.
New Screens
Select New Screen and then click the OK Button.
The new screen will be displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The new screen will be automatically created in the screen with the lowest page number from the
screens not being used.
Reusing Existing Screens
1. Select Reuse Existing Screen and then click the OK Button. Proceed as described below for new
screens or for reusing screens.
4-18
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2. The Reuse Existing Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the projects with the screen to be reused.
3. The Select Page Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the screen to be reused and then click the
OK Button.
4. When the screen with the applicable sheet settings is selected, the following dialog box will be displayed. To cancel the sheet settings, click the No Button and proceed to step 5.
The sheet will be copied with the same sheet number as that of the original sheet. If a sheet with
the same sheet number as the copied sheet already exists, a message will be displayed confirming
whether to overwrite the sheet. Click the Yes Button to overwrite the existing sheet with the sheet
being reused. Click the No Button to use the existing sheet.
The selected screen will be used to create a new screen.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When using a screen created for a PT with color displays in creating a project for the [email protected], the screen will be displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels in the preview. When using a
screen created for the [email protected] in creating a project for a PT with color displays, the screen
will be displayed in color in the preview.
4-19
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Opening Existing Screens
1. Select File - Open Screen or click the Open Screen Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
2. The Open Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the screen to be opened and then click the OK Button.
1
2
4
3
5
4-20
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Details
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the pop-up screen.
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in pages where the error check detected an error.
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the screen page being used.
Previews the selected screen. The screen will not be previewed if the check is removed from the
Preview check box.
Display a specified screen by specifying the screen page number and clicking the Jump Button.
3. The selected screen will be displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for opening screens are the Ctrl + O Keys.
♦ When an unused screen page number is opened, a new screen will be created.
Saving Screens
Select File - Save Screen or click the Save Screen Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for saving screens are the Ctrl + S Keys.
♦ If a screen has been changed but not saved yet, a dialog box confirming whether to save the
changes will be displayed when the screen is closed.
Click the Yes Button to save the changes.
♦ The setting for whether the screen is a pop-up screen is saved in the project file (*.IPP). Therefore,
even if pop-up screen is set in the screen properties, the screen will operate as a base screen
when running the PT if the project has not been saved.
After changing the setting from a base screen to a pop-up screen, the relationship between whether
the project or screen is saved and operations at the PT is as follows:
Save project
Yes
Save screen
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Operations at the PT
Operates as a pop-up screen.
Operates as a pop-up screen.
(Uses the screen size that was set when the screen was
last saved.)
Operates as a base screen.
Yes: Saves; No: Does not save
4-21
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Close Screen
1. Select File - Close Screen or click the Close Button
Screen Zoomed Out
at the top right of the screen.
Screen Zoomed In
Click
Click
Save All
This function saves the whole project as well as the open screen.
1. Select File - Save All.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed when saving has been completed.
Click the OK Button.
4-2-2
Screen Maintenance
Screen data maintenance, such as copying and deleting screens, switching screen page numbers, and
changing screen titles can be performed for the following items.
Item
Change Title
Duplicate
Delete
Switch Screen Page Number
Details
Changes the screen title.
Copies the specified screen.
Deletes the specified screen.
Switches the screen’s page number.
4-22
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-2-3
Procedure
The screen maintenance procedure is as follows:
1. Select Tools - Screen Maintenance.
The Screen Maintenance Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the screen on which maintenance will be performed.
3. Perform maintenance as follows:
Switching Screen Page Numbers
Click the Move Up and Move Down Buttons to switch to higher or lower page numbers.
Copying
Click the Duplicate Button to display the following dialog box, and then set the destination screen
page number and the new screen title.
Deleting
Click the Delete Button.
Changing Titles
Enter the new title in the title column.
4. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the screen page number to be copied is already being used, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Cancel Button and specify a different screen page number to stop the screen being overwritten.
♦ Screens that have been deleted cannot be restored. Therefore, check the screen page number
carefully before deleting it.
4-23
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-3 Sheets
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-3 Sheets
The basic sheet operations are explained here.
Sheets are screens that can be displayed in layers on multiple user screens. If, for example, objects
common to each screen such as the date, time, and screen switching objects are created as a sheet,
they can be used in more than one screen by performing some simple settings.
Base Screen/Pop-up Screen
Sheet Screen
Applied
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on sheets.
4-3-1
Creating New Sheets
1. Open the project that will be used to create the sheet.
2. Select File - Open Sheet.
3. The Open Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the sheet page number to be created and then click the OK Button.
4. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button.
4-24
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-3 Sheets
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The new sheet will be displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Sheets cannot be used to specify pop-up screens or background files, or to add macro functions.
The background color in the sheet is not applied to the destination application screen.
4-3-2
Opening Existing Sheets
1. Select File - Open Sheet.
2. The Open Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the sheet and then click the OK Button.
1
2
3
No.
1
2
3
4-3-3
Details
An asterisk (*) will be displayed for sheets where the error check detected an error.
Displays a preview of the selected sheet. The screen will not be previewed if the check is removed from the Preview check box.
Display a specified sheet by specifying the sheet page number and clicking the Jump Button.
Closing Sheets
Select File - Close Screen or click the Close Button
at the top right of the screen window.
Screen Zoomed In
Screen Zoomed Out
Click
Click
4-25
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-3 Sheets
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-3-4
Saving Sheets
Select File - Save Screen or click the Save Screen Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for saving are the Ctrl + S Keys.
♦ If a sheet has been changed but not saved yet, a dialog box confirming whether to save the
changes will be displayed when the sheet is closed.
Click the Yes Button to save the changes.
4-3-5
Applying Sheets
The methods for applying sheets to screens are described here.
1. Open the project where the sheet will be applied.
2. Select File - Apply Sheet.
The Apply Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Apply the sheet to the screen.
a. Select the screen.
b. Select the sheet page number to be applied.
c. Click the Apply Button.
A preview will be displayed of the screen to which the sheet was applied.
4-26
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-3 Sheets
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1
2
3
4
5. Apply the settings and then click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the sheet has not been saved, it will not be reflected in the preview display even when the Apply
Button is pressed.
4-3-6
Sheet Maintenance
This function is used to display the list of sheets, copy and delete sheets, switch sheet page numbers,
and change sheet titles.
Procedure
The sheet maintenance procedure is as follows:
1. Select Tools - Sheet Maintenance.
2. The procedure is the same as for Screen Maintenance. Refer to Screen Maintenance under 4-2
Creating and Saving Screens for details.
4-27
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-4 Frames
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-4 Frames
Frames are used to switch a part of the display contents in screens.
Frames consist of more than one page. The display contents can be switched by switching the pages
according to their address value.
The following objects can be arranged in the frames.
• Fixed objects
• Functional objects (Except Video Displays and Data Block Tables)
• Tables
1. Select Functional Objects - Frame or click the Frame Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
2. The cursor display will change to the following shape.
3. Move the cursor to the position of the frame’s first point.
4. Drag the cursor (by clicking the left mouse button and keeping it pressed while moving the mouse)
until it is positioned at the end point of the frame display area.
Drag
5. Select the frame, and then select Settings - Object Properties or click the right mouse button to
display the pop-up menu and select Frame Properties.
The Frame Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
General Tab Page
1
2
3
4-28
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-4 Frames
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
3
Item
Frame Page
No. of Frames
Details
Set the number of frame pages and the number of the frame page to be edited.
Set the number of frames for which the display contents are changed.
Page No. Edited
Set Background Color
Address
Specify the frame page number of the screen being created.
Frame with a Tab
Attach a Tab
to a Frame
Tab Color
Tab Position
Tab Height
Select this item to enable setting the color of the frame’s background.
Set the address that specifies the frame page number to be displayed.
Examples: Displays frame page number 0 when $W0 is 0.
Displays frame page number 1 when $W0 is 1.
Displays frame page number 2 when $W0 is 2.
Set tabs in the frame. When the PT is running, click the tabs to switch frame pages.
Select this item to create frames with tabs for each page.
Specify the tab color.
Select the position of the tabs from top, bottom, left, and right.
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Specify the tab height in 18-dot units.
Examples:
18 dots when the tab height is set to 1
36 dots when the tab height is set to 2
Control Flag Tab Page
This tab page is used to control whether all objects in the frame page have input enabled or prohibited,
and are displayed or not displayed.
Item
Enable Input
Display/No Display
Details
Select to enable or disable input for all objects in the frame or specify indirectly using
addresses.
Select whether to display all objects in the frame or specify indirectly using addresses.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the frame is set to No Display, input will not be accepted, regardless of whether the functional
objects in the frame are set to Enable Input.
♦ When indirect specification is selected, the indirect input display can be controlled according to the
specified address values, as follows:
• Enable/Disable Input
Enable Input when address is ON
(Input is enabled when the specified bit is ON, and disabled when the bit is OFF.)
Enable Input when address is OFF
(Input is disabled when the specified bit is ON, and enabled when the bit is OFF.)
• Display/No Display
Display when address is ON
(Display is enabled when the specified bit is ON, and disabled when the bit is OFF.)
Display when address is OFF
(Display is disabled when the specified bit is ON, and enabled when the bit is OFF.)
♦ Always create screens so that objects are contained within the frames.
♦ To set the communications address data format (BCD/binary) select Settings - Project Properties
and then set the format in the Data Format Tab.
4-29
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-4 Frames
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Size/Position Tab Page
This tab page is used to set the frame size and position details.
Item
Size
Height
Width
Top Left of
Screen
X
Y
Details
Set the size of the frame in dot units.
Set the height of the frame.
Set the width of the frame.
Specify the distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame in dot units,
and set the position of the frame.
Set the horizontal distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame.
Set the vertical distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame.
6. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
The method for creating screens for each frame page is as follows:
1. Double-click the frame area.
2. The functional objects and fixed objects outside the frame area will be hidden, and edit mode will
be enabled within the frame.
3. Screens are created using the same procedure as for normal screens.
4. Return to normal screen creation mode by clicking outside the frame area in the screen.
Normal screen creation mode
Screen creation mode in a frame
Double-click
Return to normal screen
creation mode
Edit frame page
Click
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on frames.
4-4-1
Creating Frame Tab Names
The frame tab title is created using text objects. By creating text within frames, the tab titles that are
not active will be hidden when the PT is running. Therefore, create tab titles when operating in normal
screen editing mode.
Click the Text Button in the toolbar and paste the text. Position the text so that it overlaps the tab position.
4-30
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
4-4 Frames
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If a message that overlapping objects is prohibited is displayed, select Tools - Options, and then
select the Edit/Disp. Tab and deselect Prohibit functional objects from overlapping.
4-4-2
Switching Frame Pages
The methods used to switch frame pages when working in NS-Designer are explained here.
Switching Frame Pages Backward and Forward
This function is used to switch to the previous or next frame page.
Select View - Previous/Next Frame Page or click the Previous/Next Frame Page Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Switching to Any Frame Page
This function is used to display a user-specified frame page.
1. Display the Frame Setting Dialog Box.
2. Specify the page number to be edited.
3. Click the OK Button.
4-31
Section 5 Object Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 5
Object Operations
This section describes common object operations.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
Creating Functional Objects.........................................................................................................................5-1
Creating Fixed Objects.................................................................................................................................5-8
Pop-up Menus ............................................................................................................................................5-12
Editing........................................................................................................................................................5-13
Layout Functions .......................................................................................................................................5-25
Colors.........................................................................................................................................................5-35
Address Settings.........................................................................................................................................5-36
Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists ....................................................................................5-42
Listing Functional Objects Used ................................................................................................................5-46
Batch Settings ............................................................................................................................................5-49
Listing Addresses Used..............................................................................................................................5-55
Cross-referencing Addresses......................................................................................................................5-59
Library Registration and Sharing Objects..................................................................................................5-63
Object Defaults ..........................................................................................................................................5-68
Editing Background Bitmaps .....................................................................................................................5-70
Options.......................................................................................................................................................5-71
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
This section describes the process from placing a functional object on a screen through to starting to
set the properties.
5-1-1
Creating One Object at a Time
Functional Objects
1. To create a new functional object, select either items under the Functional Object Menu or an icon
on the functional object toolbar.
Toolbar
The cursor will change to the following shape.
2. Move the cursor to the position that will be the starting point for the functional object.
3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the functional object.
Drag
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Hold down the Shift Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the
original vertical/horizontal ratio.
♦ Hold down the Ctrl Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object
uniformly in that direction.
♦ Deselect (turn OFF) Prohibit functional objects from overlapping on the Edit/Disp Tab Page in the Options Dialog Box (Tools - Options) to overlap functional objects with other objects.
5-1
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
N
Noottee
♦ Functional objects must be placed on touch points otherwise they will not be processed as events
when they are pressed during PT operation. (See example 1.)
♦ In addition, inputs are processed as events for the functional object located on the touch point for the
touch switch that received the input. This means that if a point is pressed where no functional object
exists but there is a functional object on the touch point in the same touch switch, the same processing
will be performed as if the functional object itself was pressed. (See example 2.)
♦ The position of touch points can be checked under View - Show Touch Points. Refer to Show Touch
Points under 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
Touch switch (area surrounded by square)
Touch point
•
Example 1
Example 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
·•
·•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
·•
·•
•
•
•
Not processed as
an event even when
button pressed.
5-1-2
Example 3
Processed as a
button event even if
the gray area is
pressed.
White section (center
of button) is processed
as an event. The gray
area is not processed
as an event.
Property Settings
Functional object properties are set in the Property Settings Dialog Box for each functional object.
1. Perform one of the following operations.
• Move the cursor to the functional object for which properties are to be set and double-click
the object.
Double-click.
• Select the functional object and select Settings - Object properties.
• Select the functional object and click the right mouse button. Select the object properties
menu from the pop-up menu that is displayed. (The menu names differ for each functional
object.)
• Select the functional object and press the Enter Key.
5-2
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2. The dialog box for setting the functional object properties will be displayed.
Make the settings on each tab page.
3. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Click the Apply Button to check the property settings on the screen while continuing to make the
settings in the dialog box.
♦ Perform the following procedure to display the Property Settings Dialog Box for the functional object
as soon as the functional object has been created.
1. Select Tools - Options.
2. Select the Edit/Disp Tab and select (turn ON) Open property dialog automatically after pasting
an object.
5-1-3
Creating Functional Objects Using Tables
Multiple functional objects of the same kind can be created at the same time by using tables.
The following functional objects can be created using tables.
• ON/OFF Buttons
• Word Buttons
• Command Buttons
• Bit lamps
• Word lamps
• Text objects
• Numeral display and input objects
• String display and input objects
5-3
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Item names
Rows (horizontal)
Columns (vertical)
Placing Tables on Screens
1. Either select Functional objects - Table or click the Table Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The cursor will change to the following shape:
2. Move the cursor to the position that will be the starting point for the functional object.
3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the table display region.
Drag
Setting Table Properties
Settings, such as the number of lines and columns in a table and the functional objects to be created, are
made in the Property Settings Dialog Box for the table.
To display the Property Settings Dialog Box, select the table and select Settings – Object Properties,
or right-click and select the Table properties from the pop-up menu.
The Table Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
5-4
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
Item
Table type
Combo Box
Functional Object Default
Button
Allocate address automatically
2
Item name and
No. of items
Position of item
name
No. of items
3
Item Name
Default Button
Focus move direction by Enter
Key
Details
Sets the type of functional object to be created in the table and the properties.
Select the type of functional object to be created in the table.
Click the Functional Object Default Button to display the Property Settings Dialog
Box for the functional object selected from the combo box and set the properties
for all functional objects created in the table.
If the address is to be automatically allocated, the start address must be specified
beforehand.
Select Allocate address automatically to specify the direction and interval for functional objects in the table and automatically allocate the address. The direction can
be selected as either horizontal or vertical.
Example: Start address for address allocation: $B100
Direction: Horizontal; Interval: 2
Sets the item name position and number of items for tables.
Item names can be set automatically using text objects.
The item name position can be selected from top line, left column, or top line and
left column. Select None if item names are not required.
Set the number of functional objects to be set in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Click the Item Name Default Button to display the Property Setting Dialog Box for
text objects and set the properties for all item names.
Right or left can be selected as the direction for input focus to move when the Enter Key is pressed after functional object input has been completed. This option is
enabled for numeral display and input objects and string display and input objects.
Select None if focus travel is not required.
3. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
Batch Table Settings
Batch property settings can be made for lines or columns of functional objects in tables.
1. Select one functional object in the line or column for which the properties are to be edited.
Making batch settings for the first line.
2. Click the right mouse button and select Batch setting of table - Unit setting of column or Batch
setting of table - Unit setting of row from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
5-5
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. The Table Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Functional Object Default Button to display the Batch Setting Dialog Box.
4. The rest of the procedure is the same as for normal settings.
Changing Table Size, Line Height, and Column Widths
The width and height of functional objects in tables can be freely changed in line or column units.
Changing Individual Line Heights or Column Widths
This section describes how to change the line height or column width without changing the size of the
table.
The cursor shape changes as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the
horizontal or vertical edges of the functional object.
Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the line or column has reached the desired size.
5-6
Section 5 Object Operations
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Changing Table Size
This section describes how to change the size of tables without changing the ratio of the line height to
the column width.
1. The cursor shape changes as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to
the table.
2. Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the table has reached the desired size.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The table width or height can be changed independently.
With the cursor changed to the
shape, drag the cursor in the horizontal or vertical direction.
5-7
Section 5 Object Operations
5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
This section describes the process from placing a fixed object on a screen through to starting to set
the properties.
5-2-1
Drawing New Fixed Objects
Either select items under the Fixed Object Menu or select an icon on the fixed object toolbar to create
a new fixed object.
Rectangles, Circles, Ovals, and Straight Lines
1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the rectangle, circle, oval, or straight line.
2. The cursor will change to the following shape:
3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the rectangle, circle, oval, or straight line.
Drag
Polygons and Polylines
1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the polygon or polyline and click the left mouse button.
2. Move the cursor to the next point and click the left mouse button. Repeat this operation until all the
points for the polygon or polyline are drawn.
Left click
Left click
Left click
3. Click the right mouse button at the last point to close the drawing mode for polygon and polyline.
Right click
5-8
Section 5 Object Operations
5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Sectors and Arcs
1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the sector or arc and click the left mouse button.
2. Drag the cursor to draw a circle or oval.
A square mark (g) will appear at the 3-o’clock point on the circumference of the circle or ellipse.
3. Place the cursor on the square box. When the cursor has changed to a plus sign (+), drag the cursor to any position.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the drawing mode for sectors and arcs.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Hold down the Shift Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the
original vertical/horizontal ratio.
♦ Hold down the Ctrl Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.
♦ Deselect (turn OFF) Prohibit functional objects from overlapping on the Edit/Disp Tab Page in the
Options Dialog Box (Tools - Options) to overlap fixed objects with other objects.
5-9
Section 5 Object Operations
5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Property Settings
Fixed object properties are set in the Property Setting Dialog Box for each fixed object.
1. Select the fixed objects for which the properties are to be set.
2. Perform one of the following operations.
Move the cursor to the fixed object for which properties are to be set and double-click the object.
Double-click
After selecting the fixed object, select Settings - Object properties.
After selecting the fixed object, click the right mouse button and select the object properties menu
from the pop-up menu that is displayed. (The menu names differ for each fixed object.)
After selecting the fixed object, press the Enter Key.
3. The dialog box for setting the fixed object properties will be displayed.
Make the settings on each tab page.
4. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
5-10
Section 5 Object Operations
5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Use the following procedure to display the Property Setting Dialog Box as soon as a new fixed object has been created.
1. Select Tools - Options.
2. Select the Edit/Disp. Tab and select (turn ON) Open property dialog automatically after pasting
an object.
5-11
Section 5 Object Operations
5-3 Pop-up Menus
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-3 Pop-up Menus
Edit and layout functions can be displayed on a pop-up menu.
To display this pop-up edit menu, select the object and click the right mouse button.
The items on the pop-up edit menu are the same for all objects.
5-12
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4 Editing
This section describes how to edit the types of object that are positioned on a screen.
5-4-1
Undo
Discards changes and restores the previous status. The undo operation can restore up to 10 previous
operations. There are two methods for undoing operations.
Select Edit - Undo or press the Undo Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for undoing operations are the Ctrl + Z Keys.
5-4-2
Redo
Redoes operations that were undone using the Undo function.
Up to 10 previous operations can be redone. (The number of redo operations is restricted to the number of operations that have been undone.)
Select Edit - Redo or press the Redo Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
Perform the above operation again to go back one more status.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for redoing operations are the Ctrl + Y Keys.
5-13
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4-3
Cut
Cuts the selected object.
Objects that have been cut can be pasted to other positions or screens using the Paste or Offset Paste
functions. Offset Paste can be used for functional objects only.
1. Select the object.
If multiple objects are to be cut at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Select Edit - Cut or press the Cut Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
3. A dialog box to confirm the cut operation will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to cut the object or
objects.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for cutting objects are the Ctrl + X Keys.
Methods for Selecting Multiple Objects
1. Hold the Shift Key and click the object.
Click while
holding down
the Shift Key.
2. Surround the objects using the cursor.
♦ Make the following settings if the confirmation dialog box does not have to be displayed before
executing the cut operation.
1. Select Tools - Options.
2. The Options Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the Edit/Disp. Tab and deselect (turn OFF)
Display confirmation dialog when deleting objects.
5-14
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4-4
Copy
Copies the selected objects.
Objects that have been copied can be pasted to other positions or screens using the Paste or Offset
Paste functions. Offset Paste can only be used for functional objects.
1. Select the object.
If multiple objects are to be copied at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Either select Edit - Copy or click the Copy Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for copying are the Ctrl + C Keys.
5-15
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4-5
Paste
Pastes objects that have been copied or cut to other positions or screens.
Standard Paste
Pastes the object with the same settings as the original.
1. Display the paste destination screen.
2. Select Edit - Paste or press the Paste Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for standard pasting are the Ctrl + V Keys.
Offset Paste
Offset paste is supported only for functional objects. The functional object is pasted and allocated an
address determined by a specified offset.
1. Display the paste destination screen.
2. Select Edit - Offset Paste.
3. The Offset Paste Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the offset value.
4. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for offset pasting are the Ctrl + W Keys.
5-16
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4-6
Delete
Deletes the selected objects.
1. Select the object to be deleted.
If multiple objects are to be deleted at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Select Edit - Delete.
3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to delete the
object or objects.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut key for deleting objects is the Delete Key.
♦ Select Edit - Select all to delete all functional and fixed objects on the screen.
♦ Make the following settings if the confirmation dialog box is not required to be displayed before the
delete operation is executed.
1. Select Tools - Options.
2. The Options Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the Edit/Disp. Tab and deselect (turn OFF)
Display confirmation dialog when deleting objects.
♦ In contrast to the cut operation, deleted functional or fixed objects cannot be pasted elsewhere.
5-4-7
Find
Finds functional object addresses, comments, or labels.
1. Either select Edit - Find or click the Find Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The Find Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
5-17
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
3
Setting
Find What
Find From
Range
Current Screen
Details
Specifies the address, comment, or label to be found.
Selects address, comment, or label as the data to be found.
For addresses, click the Set Button to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.
Use this dialog box and enter the address to be found in the Find What column.
For comments and labels, enter the comment or label name to be found in the
Find What column. Select (turn ON) Match Case to distinguish between upper or
lower case in the search.
Select the search range from the following options.
Searches the screen displayed on top.
Whole Project
Searches the whole project.
Screens
Searches a specified range of screens. If As Sheet No is selected (turned ON),
the search will target sheets.
2. Click the Find Button to start the search.
When the search has been completed, the Search Result Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Select the desired functional object from the list of search results and click the Jump Button or
double-click on the line to be selected.
The screen where the selected functional object is found is displayed and the functional object
flashes because it is selected.
Select the object and click
the Jump Button or
double-click the object line.
The black square
cursors will flash.
5-18
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for finding objects are the Ctrl + F Keys.
If Current Screen or Screens is selected for the search range, addresses set using the following
menu items cannot be displayed. Also, if Whole Project is selected for the search range, Jump
cannot be performed from the search results to the addresses set using the following menu items.
Settings - Flicker Setting
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
Settings - Data Log Setting
Settings - Data Block Setting
Settings - System Setting
Settings - Project Properties - Macro
Settings - Screen Properties - Macro
5-19
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4-8
Replace
Replaces an address set for a functional object with another address or replaces a host set in a project
with another host.
Replacing Communications Addresses
1. Select Edit - Replace.
The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
No.
1
Setting
Address
Range
Details
Specifies the address range to be replaced.
Replaces corresponding addresses in the range Start Address to End Address, starting with Replace With (Start Address).
For the settings shown in the following dialog box, $B0 to $B100 will be replaced with
$B1000 to $B1100.
①
To replace bits, specify the bit address, e.g., HOST:00000.00.
2
Range
Select the replacement range from Current Screen, Whole Project, or Screens. If As
Sheet No is selected (turned ON), the search will target sheets.
2. Click the Replace Button. A message confirming the replacement will be displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button.
A dialog box to notify that the replace operation has been completed will be displayed.
5-20
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4. Click the OK Button.
Replacing Hosts
1. Select Edit - Replace.
The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select a host to be replaced.
No.
1
Setting
Replace
2
Search host
and Replace
host
Details
Select to replace one of the following:
Address
Host
Specify the name of the host to replace. In the following dialog box, "Serial A" is being
replaced with "Serial B."
5-21
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
3
Setting
Range
Details
Set the unit number range when the search host is a Temperature Controller. The unit
number ranges that can be set are as follows:
E5AN/E5AR: 0 to 31
E5ZN: 0 to 15
3. Click the Replace Button. A replacement confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button.
4. A dialog box will be displayed when the replacement has been completed. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for replacing addresses are the Ctrl + H Keys.
♦ If Current Screen or Screens is selected for the range for address replacement, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be replaced.
Settings - Flicker Setting
Settings - Alarm - Event Setting
Settings - Data Log Setting
Settings - Data Block Setting
Settings - System Setting
Settings - Project Properties - Macro
Settings - Screen Properties - Macro
♦ The addresses set in Internal Memory (Bit Memory and Word Memory) cannot be replaced.
5-4-9
Select All
Useful for selecting all objects or the same type of objects on a screen.
All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects
Selects all objects on the screen.
Select Edit - Select All - All Functional Objects - Fixed Objects.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for selecting all functional and fixed objects are the Ctrl + A Keys.
5-22
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Same Functional Object Type
Selects only the same type of functional or fixed object as one that has already been selected.
Select Edit - Select All - Same Functional Object Type.
Functional objects of
the same type
Fixed objects of
the same type
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for selecting all functional or fixed objects of the same type are the Ctrl + D
Keys.
5-23
Section 5 Object Operations
5-4 Editing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-4-10 Repeat
Copies the specified object the specified number of times horizontally or vertically. Functional objects
(including those inside tables or frames) can be repeated with an offset value set for the address.
1. Select the object to be repeated.
If multiple objects are to be repeated at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Select Edit - Repeat.
The Repeat Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the repeat direction.
Specify the number of repeats.
Specify the interval for the repeats.
Specify the offset value to be added to the address for repeats.
3. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
Example:
To set 3 repeats in the horizontal direction at an interval of 8 dots with an offset of
2.
8 dots
8 dots
8 dots
Object repeated 3 times horizontally.
Section 5 Object Operations
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The repeat function cannot be used for Video Displays and Data Block Tables.
5-24
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-5 Layout Functions
This section describes the layout functions used to change the size and position of objects on the
screen.
5-5-1
Changing Size
1. Select the object for which the size is to be changed.
The cursor shape will change as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to
the ■ marks at the corners of the object.
2. Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the object has reached the target size.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Hold down the Shift Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the
original vertical/horizontal ratio.
♦ Hold down the Ctrl Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.
♦ The size of a Video Display cannot be changed by using a mouse. To change the size of a Video
Display, use the setting in the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box.
5-5-2
Moving Objects
1. Place the cursor on the object to be moved.
If multiple objects are to be moved at the same time, select all those objects.
2. Once the cursor has changed as shown below, drag the object to the desired position.
Drag
5-25
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Once the object has been selected, it can be moved by selecting Layout – Nudge or by using the
Up, Down, Left, or Right Keys. Refer to 5-5-6 Nudging Objects for details.
♦ A Video Display cannot be moved to the outside of the screen.
5-5-3
Aligning and Distributing Objects
Distributes multiple objects with top, bottom, left, or right alignment or at equal intervals vertically or
horizontally.
Example:
Placing Objects at the Top of the Screen
1. Select all objects to be top-aligned.
2. Select Layout – Align/Distribution – Align Top.
The selected objects will be top-aligned, in line with the upper coordinates of the object(s) at the
top of the screen.
The following table describes the various position alignment functions.
Function
Details
Align Left
Aligns objects
to the left.
Center in a Column
Aligns objects to the center of a column.
Aligns objects
to the right.
Align Right
Align Top
Aligns objects to the top.
Center in a Row
Aligns objects to the center of row.
5-26
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Function
Details
Align Bottom
Aligns objects to the bottom.
Distribute Horizontally
Distributes objects equidistant horizontally.
Distribute Vertically
Distributes objects equidistant vertically.
5-5-4
Make Same Size
Aligns the width and height of selected multiple objects.
Example: Aligning Size of Objects with Narrowest Object
1.
Select all objects to be aligned by width.
2. Select Layout – Make Same Size – Smallest Width.
5-27
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The following table describes the various size alignment functions.
Function
Details
Smallest Width
Aligns to smallest width.
Largest Width
Aligns to largest width.
Smallest Height
Aligns to smallest height.
Largest Height
Aligns to largest height.
Table Column Width
Aligns to equal widths.
Table Row Height
Aligns to equal heights.
5-28
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-5-5
Ordering Objects
Changes the display order of overlapped objects.
Moving Objects to the Front
Moving Objects to the Back
1. Select the objects for which the display order is to be changed.
2. Select Layout – Order – Bring to Front/Send to Back or Bring to Front or Send to Back on the
toolbar.
Send to Back
Bring to Front
5-5-6
Nudging Objects
Moves selected objects vertically or horizontally in 1-dot units.
When grids are enabled, the object is moved in the set grid units.
1. Select the object to be nudged.
2. Select Layout – Nudge and then select the direction to move the object.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Press the Up, Down, Left, or Right Keys to perform the same operation.
5-29
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-5-7
Rotating and Flipping Objects
Rotates objects clockwise or counterclockwise or flips objects. Grouped multiple objects can also be
rotated or flipped.
Rotating/Flipping Around Object Rectangle
Rotates or flips the object around the center coordinates of the object rectangle. Any labels set to
functional objects will not, however, be rotated or flipped.
1. Select the object to be rotated or flipped.
2. Select Layout – Rotate/Flip and then select the direction to rotate or flip the object.
Function
Rotate Right 90 Degrees
Details
Rotate Left 90 Degrees
Flip Horizontal
Flip Vertical
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When rotating or flipping grouped objects, the center of the grouped rectangle will be the center for
the rotation or flip.
♦ Video Displays cannot be rotated or flipped.
5-30
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Rotating/Flipping Around Center of Screen/Frame
Rotates or flips the object around the center coordinates of the edit screen or frame.
1. Select the object to be rotated or flipped.
2. Select Layout – Rotate/Flip and then select the direction to rotate or flip the object.
Function
Rotate Right 90 Degrees Around Center of
Screen/Frame
Details
Rotate Left 90 Degrees Around Center of
Screen/Frame
Flip Horizontal Around Center of Screen/Frame
Flip Vertical Around Center of Screen/Frame
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Video Displays cannot be rotated or flipped.
5-5-8
Modifying Objects
Corner (node) positions and shapes of polylines, polygons, sectors, and arcs can be changed. Nodes
of polylines and polygons can also be deleted or added.
Editing Nodes
1. Select the fixed object for which the shape is to be changed.
2. Select Layout - Edit - Edit Node.
The fixed object nodes will be displayed.
5-31
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Move the cursor towards the node. When the cursor has changed to a cross (+), drag the cursor to
the new position for the node.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the edit mode for nodes.
Adding Nodes
1. Select the fixed object to which a node is to be added.
2. Select Layout – Edit – Add Node.
The fixed object nodes will be displayed.
When the cursor is placed on the border of the fixed object, the cursor will change to the following
shape.
3. Click the position on the border where a node is to be added. A node will be added between two
existing nodes. Nodes can be added until there are only 4 dots or less between two nodes.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the add mode for nodes.
Removing Nodes
1. Select the fixed object from which a node is to be removed.
2. Select Layout – Edit – Remove Node.
The fixed object nodes will be displayed.
The cursor will change to the following shape when brought close to a node.
3. Click the node to be removed.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the remove mode for nodes.
5-32
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-5-9
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects
Grouping multiple functional or fixed objects allows them to be handled as one group when editing or
adjusting layout. Grouped objects can also be grouped with other functional or fixed objects or placed
in other groups.
Grouping Objects
1. Select the functional or fixed objects to be grouped.
2. Select Layout – Group.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for grouping objects are the Ctrl + G Keys.
♦ Video Displays and tables cannot be grouped.
♦ The CSV file import/export function can be used to set functional object properties while the functional objects are still grouped (labels, comments, and addresses only). Refer to Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files for information.
Ungrouping Objects
Restores grouped functional or fixed objects to individual objects.
1. Select the group to be ungrouped.
2. Select Layout – Ungroup.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for ungrouping objects are the Ctrl + U Keys.
♦ Only one group can be ungrouped at a time.
5-33
Section 5 Object Operations
5-5 Layout Functions
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Editing Properties of Grouped Objects
Edit the properties of grouped functional or fixed objects using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor over the functional or fixed object to be edited, and double-click the left mouse
button.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for object A.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for the box.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for object C.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for object B.
2. The Property Dialog Box for that functional or fixed object will open. Edit the properties as required.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the mouse button is double-clicked at a position where two or more functional or fixed objects
overlap, the Property Dialog Box for the top object will be opened.
To edit grouped functional or fixed objects as a device library object, select Edit Smart Active Parts
in the Edit/Disp Tab Page opened from the Options Dialog Box (Tools – Options).
5-34
Section 5 Object Operations
5-6 Colors
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-6 Colors
Display colors for functional and fixed objects and other colors are selected in the Color Setting Dialog
Box. There are two kinds of Color Setting Dialog Boxes. Select the Color Setting Dialog Box that will
normally be used from the Color Dialog Tab Page under Tools – Options. Refer to 5-16 Options for
details.
The method for displaying the Color Setting Dialog Box is described below. Refer to Setting Colors under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions in the NS Series Programming Manual for details on the
dialog box.
Property Setting Dialog Boxes
Click the Setting Button next to the color settings column in each Property Setting Dialog Box to display the Color Setting Dialog Box.
Toolbar
Select the object and click the ▼ Button on the color toolbar to display the Color Setting Dialog Box.
5-35
Section 5 Object Operations
5-7 Address Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-7 Address Settings
Addresses used for referencing data required for display and for storing entered data can be allocated
in any PLC area or PT internal memory area. The display status of objects can be changed and the PT
status can be controlled and notified by directly writing to and reading from addresses during PT operation.
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Address
setting
Index
setting
Details
Enter the addresses to be set. The address can be entered directly. Alternatively, click the
Setting Button and enter the address in the displayed dialog box. If an invalid address is
entered, an error message will be displayed when the OK Button is pressed. Invalid addresses
cannot be set.
The index setting function is used to allow the addresses allocated to objects to be
changed by changing the index attached to a specified area. These variables are called
index setting. This enables one object to refer to many addresses. Area types, however,
cannot be changed with an index.
There are 10 index settings available (I0 to I9).
Change the contents of system memory to change index setting. ($SW27 to $SW36)
Example Using Indexes
Specified Address: Serial A: HR00000.00I0
The communications address will automatically change based on the I0 value.
I0 ($SW27) value
Address
0
Serial A: HR00000.00
1
Serial A: HR00000.01
2
Serial A: HR00000.02
⋅⋅⋅
⋅⋅⋅
Enter index settings directly into the address input column.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the address exceeds the setting range as a result of an index being specified, the address will be
invalid and communications will not be processed.
♦ Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS Series Programming Manual for details on system memory.
5-36
Section 5 Object Operations
5-7 Address Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-7-1
Setting Addresses
Click the Setting Button to the right of the setting column to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.
This section describes how to enter addresses using this dialog box.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
Setting
Host name
2
Area Type
3
Address
4
Input Button
Details
Select the registered host name under Settings – Register Host or select the
host from PT memory.
Select the communications area.
Word or Bit specification are only displayed when those address types can be set.
For example, the Word option will not be displayed when making address settings
for ON/OFF Buttons.
Displays and sets the communications address.
The host address is expressed as a 5-digit word address or 5-digit word address
and 2-digit bit address. If the address entered here does not have enough digits,
the number of digits are automatically adjusted and the address written to the address setting column.
Example: If word “1” is entered as the address:
“00001” will be entered in the address setting column.
Click the Input Button to enter the word or bit.
5-37
Section 5 Object Operations
5-7 Address Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-7-2
Registering Hosts
Communications with multiple PLCs is possible with NS-series PTs. Specify a host name and addresses for each connected PLC to allow access to any PLC memory area.
Registering New Hosts
This section describes how to register hosts.
1. Select Settings – Register Host.
The Register Host Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Click the Add Button.
3. The Edit Host Dialog Box will be displayed. Register all settings in this dialog box.
Enter a host name
(up to 16 characters).
4. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Up to 98 hosts can be registered, not including Serial A and Serial B.
Editing Registered Hosts
1. Select the host to be edited.
2. Click the Edit Button.
5-38
Section 5 Object Operations
5-7 Address Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. The Edit Host Dialog Box will be displayed. Edit the settings in this dialog box.
4. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ “Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when PLC has been set to serial ports A and B under System Setting. Only the host name can be changed in these cases.
To delete hosts, set serial ports A and B to None under Settings – System Setting (Comm-All
Tab Page).
Deleting Registered Hosts
1. Select the host to be deleted.
2. Click the Delete Button.
3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ “Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when PLC has been set to serial ports A and B under System Setting. Hosts cannot be deleted using the Delete Button in these cases.
♦ If a host address is set to a functional object and that host is subsequently deleted, ??? will be applied as the address host name. An error check can be executed to check for illegal addresses. The
alarm/event, Data Log, Data Block, and system memory addresses will not, however, be checked
for errors.
Projects with ??? applied as the host name will not operate normally on the PT. Be careful with addresses when hosts are deleted.
Moving Registered Hosts
1. Select the host to be moved.
2. Click the Move Up or Move Down Button to move the host up or down.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ “Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial
ports A and B. This applies when PLC has been set to serial ports A and B under System Setting.
Hosts cannot be moved in these cases.
Furthermore, other hosts cannot be moved above these two hosts.
5-39
Section 5 Object Operations
5-7 Address Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Importing and Exporting CSV Files
Use the CSV file import and export functions to edit settings efficiently.
1. Click the Export CSV or Import CSV Button.
2. To export files, specify the save directory and the file name and then click the Save Button. If importing from a CSV file, select the name of the file to be imported and click the Open Button.
3. An error check is performed when files are imported and any detected errors are displayed in a
dialog box, like the one shown below.
1
2
No.
1
2
Details
Displays the line number in the CSV file data where the error was found.
Displays the error number. Refer to the following table for details.
Error No.
Details
1
Format error in imported CSV file.
Check that the imported file is in CSV format.
Check that the settings are valid.
2
Insufficient memory. Settings
contained in CSV file cannot be
imported.
Could not open the CSV file. CSV
file could not be imported.
Close any unnecessary applications and reexecute the import operation.
3
Countermeasure
Check that the file is not being used by another
application. If the file is being used by another
application, close the file and then re-execute
the import operation.
The output CSV file will be displayed in the following format.
(When displayed using Microsoft Excel.)
The host ID is the number automatically allocated to the host when it is registered. The host ID does
not change even if it is different from the number in the Register Host Dialog Box or if the host is deleted.
5-40
Section 5 Object Operations
5-7 Address Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Use 3 onwards when adding new hosts to the imported CSV file. Numbers 1 and 2 are reserved for
the following communications settings.
1
2
Serial port A
Serial port B
N
Noottee
♦ When CSV files are edited using spreadsheet software, a message warning that some changes
may be lost if the file is saved in the current format may be displayed when the file is closed. This
will not adversely affect PT operation.
♦ Serial ports A and B can only be added or deleted under Settings – System Setting. Serial ports A
and B cannot be added by importing CSV files. Serial port A and B information is not output when
CSV files are exported.
5-41
Section 5 Object Operations
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
Lists of property settings for functional objects in each screen can be displayed and checked and the
order of the listed properties (ID No., comment, label, address, font name, text color, text attributes,
color, etc.) can be changed. Also, the display can be changed, using the jump function, to the position
of a specified functional object.
1. Either select Tools – Functional Object List or click the Functional Object List Button on the
toolbar.
Toolbar
The Functional Object List Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Range
Address Display
Method
Multiple Addresses in 1
Line
One Address
in 1 Line
(Displayed in
Multiple Line)
Details
Select the range for the functional object list display from Current Screen, Whole
Project, or Screens. If As Sheet No is selected (turned ON), the functional objects in
sheets will be the range for the list.
Select the address display method from the following options.
The addresses set for one functional object are displayed horizontally on one line.
The addresses set for one functional object are displayed vertically over multiple
lines.
2. Make the settings and then click the Display Button.
3. The Functional Object List Window will be displayed.
5-42
Section 5 Object Operations
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Properties
Displays the property
settings for each
functional object.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for displaying functional object lists are the Ctrl + L Keys.
♦ If the same address is used more than once in the same macro, that address is only counted as
being used once.
♦ Macro 1 to Macro 4 only indicate whether or not macros have been set to that functional object.
These display items do not indicate whether or not addresses are used in macros.
Sorting by Settings
Sorts functional object lists in ascending or descending order of properties.
1. Click the titles of the properties to be sorted and select the whole column.
Click here.
2. Click the Ascending Order or Descending Order Button.
Sorting Addresses in Ascending Order
The addresses are sorted alphabetically,
so $B30 is listed in this position.
5-43
Section 5 Object Operations
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Sorting Addresses in Descending Order
The addresses are sorted
alphabetically, so $B30 is
listed in this position.
Jumping to Functional Objects
The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the list to the position on the screen of a
specified object.
1. Click the number of the destination functional object to select the whole row.
Select the
destination
functional object.
2. Click the Jump Button or double-click the selected row.
The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object
will flash because it is selected.
N
Noottee
♦ If Minimize when Jump is deselected (turned OFF) in the Functional Object List Window, the window will not be minimized when the jump function is used, but the destination functional object will
flash because it is selected.
5-44
Section 5 Object Operations
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Saving to File
Saves the contents of the Functional Object List Window to a CSV file.
1. Click the Save to File Button in the Functional Object List Window.
2. The Save Used Functional Object List Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file
name for the save operation.
3. Click the Save Button.
5-8-1
Redisplaying Lists
Click the Display Button in the Functional Object List Dialog Box to redisplay the list to change the
display range or refresh the display.
5-45
Section 5 Object Operations
5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
Lists the number of functional objects in the whole project or in a specified screen.
The display can also be changed (using the jump function) from the list to a specified screen.
5-9-1
Displaying Lists of Used Functional Objects
The method for displaying a list of used functional objects is described below.
1. Either select Tools – List Up Functional Objects Used or click the List Up Functional Objects
Used Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The List Up Functional Objects Used Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
No.
1
Setting
Range
Details
Select either Screen or Whole Project as the search range for the list of functional
objects used. If As Sheet No is selected (turned ON), functional objects in sheets
will be the range for the search. Select Whole Project and select (turn ON) Also
Display Unused Screen No. to included unused screens in the search range.
2. Make the settings and then click the Find Button.
5-46
Section 5 Object Operations
5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. The number of functional objects used are displayed in a tree structure for each screen, frame, and
table.
Click + to expand the tree.
Screens with the functional object are displayed in green and those without the functional object
are displayed in red.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
1
2
3
4
Details
Displays the screen page number.
Displays the number of functional objects in each screen.
Displays the screen title.
Click + to expand the tree.
5
The number of functional objects in the frame are displayed for each frame page.
6
Displays the number of functional objects in tables.
5-47
Section 5 Object Operations
5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-9-2
Jumping to Screens, Tables, and Frames
The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the List Up Functional Objects Used Dialog
Box to a specified screen or table or frame screen position.
1. Click the destination screen, table, or frame to select it.
Click here.
2. Click the Jump Button.
The selected screen will be opened. Alternatively, the table or frame will flash to indicate that it has
been selected.
When a Screen Is Selected.
When a Table or Frame Is Selected.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The jump operation can also be performed by double-clicking on the screen or table/frame line.
5-48
Section 5 Object Operations
5-10 Batch Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-10 Batch Settings
Changes settings for the main properties of multiple functional objects of the same type from the functional object list. Settings for the following properties can be changed as a batch.
• Comments
• Labels
• Addresses
Functional objects can also be added to or deleted from lists.
Functional Object Property Settings
Properties for each functional object can be set as a batch. This section describes how to change settings using ON/OFF Button functional objects as an example.
1. Select the functional objects for which the properties are to be set together.
Drag
2. Select Settings – Change Settings at Once.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for changing functional object settings as a batch are the Ctrl + K Keys.
The Change Settings at Once Window will be displayed. The properties for the selected functional
object will be displayed in a list.
3. Double-click the cell for the property items to be set to enter input mode.
Input mode
5-49
Section 5 Object Operations
5-10 Batch Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4. Enter the settings data.
5. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Addresses can also be set from the Address Setting Dialog Box.
Click the Set Address Button to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.
♦ The batch-setting function cannot be used if functional objects of different types are selected.
♦ The batch-setting function cannot be used if frames or tables are selected.
Adding One Line
New functional objects can be created from the Change Settings at Once Dialog Box by adding a line.
1. Click a line to select it.
Click here.
2. Click the Add Line Button.
A new line will be added directly below the selected line. An ID number will be automatically
added, using the next lowest free number.
A line is added.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The Add Line function cannot be used for Video Displays and Data Block Tables.
5-50
Section 5 Object Operations
5-10 Batch Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Click the OK Button. The newly added functional object will be displayed at the top left of the
screen.
A new functional object is added.
Deleting Lines
Functional objects can be deleted by deleting lines from the Change Settings at Once Dialog Box.
1. Click the line for the functional object to be deleted.
Click here.
2. Click the Delete Line Button.
3. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to delete the line (and the object).
ここ
The line will be deleted.
A line is deleted.
5. Click the OK Button. The functional object will be deleted from the screen.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the operation to delete all lines is performed, all selected lines will be deleted, but a new line will
be added and a new functional object of the same type will be created.
5-51
Section 5 Object Operations
5-10 Batch Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Settings
The settings in each cell can be cut, copied, or pasted.
1. Click the cell with the settings to be cut or copied.
Select the settings
item to be copied.
2. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select Cut or Copy from the displayed pop-up
menu.
Click the right mouse button.
3. Click the cell where the settings data is to be pasted.
Select the target cell.
4. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select Paste from the displayed pop-up menu.
Click the right
mouse button.
5-52
Section 5 Object Operations
5-10 Batch Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The cut or copied data will be pasted.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Multiple settings can be selected and copied and pasted. Select all the target cells when performing
the paste operation.
♦ The shortcut keys for cutting settings are the Ctrl + X Keys.
♦ The shortcut keys for copying settings are the Ctrl + C Keys.
♦ The shortcut keys for pasting settings are the Ctrl + V Keys.
♦ The shortcut key for clearing cells is the Delete Key.
Repeating Settings
Duplicates the settings for a selected cell. Addresses or character strings can be copied along with
specified offsets for numeric values contained in them.
1. Click the settings item to be repeated.
Select the settings
item to be repeated.
2. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select Repeat from the displayed pop-up menu.
Click the right
mouse button.
The Repeat Dialog Box will be displayed.
5-53
Section 5 Object Operations
5-10 Batch Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
No. of Repetitions
Replace
Replace Number in
Character String
String Type
Offset
Details
Sets the number of repetitions.
Replaces existing data with the repeat string.
If Replace Number in Character String is selected (turned ON), the numeric
value in the character string is incremented and the string is copied.
Select Character to replace numeric values in comment or label strings. Select
Address to replace numbers in addresses.
Example: Character – Button 1, Button 2, Button 3,…
Address − $B0, $B1, $B2,….
Specifies the offset value to be added to the numeric value being replaced.
3. Make the settings and then click the Repeat Button.
5-54
Section 5 Object Operations
5-11 Listing Addresses Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-11 Listing Addresses Used
Displays a list of the number of functional objects using each address and a list of functional objects
using each address. Can also jump to specified functional object screen positions.
Displaying Lists of Used Addresses
Displays a list of addresses that are used.
1. Either select Tools – List Up Addresses Used or click the List Up Addresses Used Button on
the toolbar.
Toolbar
The List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
No.
1
Setting
Search
Address
No. of Addresses
2
3
Search until Max
No.
No. of Addresses
Displayed in 1 Line
Range
Details
Specifies the conditions for the address search.
Sets the start address for the search range.
Specifies how many words or bits to search for from the address specified under
Address.
Select (turn ON) Search until Max No. to search until the largest bit or word from
the address specified under Address.
Sets the number of addresses displayed in one line.
Select the search range from Current Screen, Whole Project, or Screens. If As
Sheet No is selected (turned ON), functional objects in sheets will be the display
range.
2. Make the settings and then click the Search Button.
3. The used bits and words are displayed for each address.
Red: Not used
White: Displays the number of
used bits and words.
5-55
Section 5 Object Operations
5-11 Listing Addresses Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Saving Search Results to File
Saves the list of search results to a CSV file.
1. Click the Save to File Button.
2. The Save List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file
name for the save operation.
3. Click the Save Button.
4. A dialog box to notify that the save operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the OK
Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ An example of CSV file output is given below. The search results are given for each address and
separated by commas.
5-56
Section 5 Object Operations
5-11 Listing Addresses Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Printing
Prints search results.
1. Click the Print Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
3. A dialog box to notify that the print operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the OK
Button.
N
Noottee
♦ An example of print output is given below.
List Up Addresses Used
Addresses
Searching Again
Click the Search Button and make the settings again in the List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box to respecify the search range or refresh the data.
5-57
Section 5 Object Operations
5-11 Listing Addresses Used
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Displaying Lists of Used Functional Objects
Displays a list of the functional objects that use the selected addresses.
1. Click the cell for the target address. The functional objects using that address will be displayed.
2. Click the Details Button or double-click the cell.
Double-click the cell.
A list of the functional objects using the specified address will be displayed.
No. of searches
Displays a list of the screen
page number where address
located, functional object ID
number, comment, and label.
Jumping to Functional Objects
The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the list to the position on the screen of a
selected functional object.
1. Select the target functional object.
2. Click the Jump Button or double-click the selected row.
The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object
will flash because it is selected.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If Minimize when Jump is deselected (turned OFF) in the List Up Addresses Used Window, the
window will not be minimized when the jump function is used, but the destination functional object
will flash because it is selected.
5-58
Section 5 Object Operations
5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
Searches and displays in a list the status of addresses and functional objects in each screen. Addresses allocated to each functional object can also be replaced and search results can be output to
files or printed.
Displaying Address Cross References
Searches and displays in a list the status of addresses and functional objects.
1. Select Tools – Address Cross Reference.
2. The Address Cross Reference Window will be displayed. Set the search conditions.
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Range
Search Results
Display Area
Details
Select either Whole Project or Screen as the search range for the address cross
reference display. If As Sheet No is selected (turned ON), address cross references
in sheets will be the range for the search.
Executes the search and displays a list of search results.
3. Make the settings and then click the Find Button.
A list of search results will be displayed.
Addresses and Functional Object ID Numbers (Screen Page Numbers)
Note: An “S” will appear before sheet page numbers.
Example: PB0001(S3) is an ON/OFF Button on sheet page 3.
5-59
Section 5 Object Operations
5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The shortcut keys for displaying address cross references are the Ctrl + R Keys.
♦ If Screen is selected for the range, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be displayed.
Settings - Flicker Setting
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
Settings - Data Log Setting
Settings - Data Block Setting
Settings - System Setting
Settings - Project Properties - Macro
Settings - Screen Properties - Macro
Replacing Addresses
After searches have been executed, addresses allocated to functional objects can be replaced in one
operation.
1. Click the Replace Button.
2. The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed. Refer to Replace in 5-4 Editing for detailed settings.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When replacing an address set as a flicker or alarm/event setting, or as a data block interlock address, include the relay number in the specified address. Replacement will not be performed properly if the relay number is not specified.
Saving Search Results to File
Saves the list of search results to a CSV file.
1. Click the Save to File Button.
2. The Save Cross Reference Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the
save operation.
5-60
Section 5 Object Operations
5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Click the Save Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ An example of CSV file output is given below. The search results are given for each address and
separated by commas.
Printing Search Results
Prints a list of search results.
1. Click the Print Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
3. A dialog box to notify that the print operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the OK
Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ An example of print output is given below.
Cross-reference
Address
Functional object ID (Page) (Sn=sheet)
5-61
Section 5 Object Operations
5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Searching Again
Click the Find Button to re-specify the search range or refresh the data.
Displaying Detailed Functional Object Information
Displays detailed information for the functional objects that use the specified addresses. The following
information is displayed.
• Screen page numbers where the functional object is located.
• ID number
• Comment
• Label
1. Select the addresses for which detailed information is required.
2. Double-click the selected row or click the Details Button.
The Search Result Dialog Box will be displayed.
Jumping to Functional Objects
Jumps to specified functional object screen paste positions.
1. Click a functional object to select it.
2. Double-click the selected row or click the Jump Button.
The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object
will flash because it is selected.
5-62
Section 5 Object Operations
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
A library is a collection of objects with set properties. Grouped objects can also be registered in the library.
Library objects can be easily placed and used as a single object on other projects or screens.
5-13-1 Registering Library Objects
An object and all of its properties settings can be registered to a library as one object.
1. Select the object to be registered to a library.
2. Either select Tools – Register Library or click the Register Library Button on the toolbar.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be registered in the library.
The Library Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
Setting
Category
2
Category
3
Preview
4
Title
Details
Displays the library configuration on a menu tree. Click + to expand the display
to lower categories.
The category corresponds to the folder where the registered library objects are
stored for easy management.
Displays a preview of the library object registered to the selected category.
Click the @ to select. The border will be displayed in red.
Displays the title of the selected library object.
5-63
Section 5 Object Operations
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4. Select the storage locations of the category where the library is registered and the preview column.
5. Click the Register Button.
6. The Library Title Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the title for the library object to be registered and
click the OK Button.
7. Make the settings and then click the Close Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the Register Button is clicked while a location where library objects are registered is selected, the
existing library objects will be overwritten.
Sharing Objects
This section describes how to share objects registered in the library and place these objects on
screens.
1. Either select Tools – Use Library or click the Use Library Button on the toolbar.
The Library Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Specify the category and select the library object to be shared in the preview column.
5-64
Section 5 Object Operations
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Click the Use Button.
The Library Dialog Box will be minimized and the library object will be placed on the upper left of
the screen.
Managing the Library
Categories and library objects are managed and registration data is changed from the Library Dialog
Box.
Either select Tools – Use Library or click the Use Library Button on the toolbar to display the Library
Dialog Box.
Adding Categories
1. Select the category above where a new category is to be added.
Example: Adding a “Command Button” below “Buttons”
2. Click the New Category Button to create a new category.
3. Enter the category name.
5-65
Section 5 Object Operations
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Deleting Categories
1. Select the category to be deleted.
2. Click the Delete Category Button.
3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Be careful when deleting categories because all library objects registered in that category will also
be deleted.
Changing Categories
1. Select the category for which the name is to be changed.
2. Click the Change Name Button.
The category name will be displayed in reverse video and can now be edited.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Library Objects
This section describes how to cut or copy objects in the library and paste them to other categories.
1. Select the library object to be cut or copied.
2. Click the Cut or Copy Button.
3. Select the category where the object is to be pasted from the list of categories.
4. Click the Paste Button.
Deleting Library Objects
Deletes objects from the library.
1. Select the library object to be deleted.
2. Click the OK Button.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ In contrast to the cut operation, deleted library objects cannot be pasted elsewhere. Be careful when deleting objects.
5-66
Section 5 Object Operations
5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Changing Library Object Titles
Changes library object titles.
1. Select the library object for which the title is to be changed.
2. Click the Change Title Button.
3. The Library Title Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the new title and click the OK Button.
Refreshing Information
Data is refreshed from the Library Dialog Box.
Click the Update Button.
Viewing Library Object Previews
The view function opens and displays library object previews in a separate dialog box. If the library
object is smaller than the display area in the dialog box, the object will be displayed at full size. If the
object is larger than the display area, the size will be adjusted to fit the display area.
Click the View Button.
The library object will be displayed in a different dialog box.
Section 5
Object Operations
5-67
Section 5 Object Operations
5-14 Object Defaults
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-14 Object Defaults
Property settings when objects are placed on screens can be specified.
Defaults can be set for each functional object type and common fixed object defaults can be set.
5-14-1 Registering Defaults
Specific property values are registered as defaults. Registered properties are used as the defaults for
the subsequent functional or fixed objects created.
1. Display the Property Dialog Box for the functional or fixed object with the properties to be registered as defaults.
2. Select (turn ON) Use as default.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Whether or not Record Operation Log in the Write Tab Page is checked cannot be set as a default.
5-14-2 Resetting Defined Defaults
Returns properties registered as defaults to the NS-Designer default settings.
1. Select Settings – Reset Defined Default and then select Functional Object/Fixed Object.
2. A dialog box to confirm the reset operation will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
5-68
Section 5 Object Operations
5-14 Object Defaults
NS-Designer Operation Manual
①
3. A dialog box to notify that the reset operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the OK
Button.
①
5-69
Section 5 Object Operations
5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps
Image editing software can be started and BMP or JPEG files of background bitmaps can be created
and edited.
1. Select Tools – Edit Background Bitmap.
The image editor will open.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If a background bitmap has been set already, that data will be read automatically.
♦ If new BMP or JPEG files are to be used as background bitmaps, settings must be made in the
Screen Properties Dialog Box. Refer to 4-1 Basic Operations for details.
♦ The image editor that will be opened depends on the settings under Tools – Options. Refer to 5-16
Options for details.
This menu cannot be selected if no image editor has been set.
5-70
Section 5 Object Operations
5-16 Options
NS-Designer Operation Manual
5-16 Options
Makes optional settings for NS-Designer operations.
1. Select Tools – Options.
The Option Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the settings and then click the OK Button.
Optional settings consist of the 3 types shown below.
5-16-1 Color Dialog
Selects the type of Set Color Dialog Box that will be displayed for setting colors. If User Palette is selected, up to 15 colors can be registered on the palette.
Click the Test Button to display a sample dialog box.
5-16-2 Edit/Disp.
Makes the settings for editing objects.
1
2
3
4
5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
Open property dialog automatically after pasting an
object
Prohibit functional objects
from overlapping
Display confirmation dialog
when deleting objects
Show ID and address with
small font
Edit Smart Active Parts
(SAP)
Details
Select this option to display the Property Setting Dialog Box immediately
after pasting an object.
Select this option to prohibit functional objects from overlapping.
Select this option to display a confirmation dialog box when cutting or
deleting objects.
Select this option to display the ID number in small font when displaying
the ID.
Select this option to open the property dialog of frames and functional
objects that compose Smart Active Parts (SAP) without ungrouping the
objects/frames. By enabling this option, objects can also be moved and
the size of the objects can be changed.
5-71
Section 5 Object Operations
5-16 Options
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Fixed objects can still be overlapped even if Prohibit functional objects from overlapping is selected
(turned ON).
5-16-3 Editor
Specifies the editor used when editing text or bitmap files.
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Text Editor
Image Editor
Details
Specifies the editor execution file name used when editing text files.
Specifies the editor execution file name used when editing bitmap files.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The executable file path for each editor depends on the operating system.
Re-specify the editor execution file if the operating system has been changed.
Sec tion 5
Obj ect Oper ations
5-16-4 Labels
The magnification can be specified for automatic adjustment of font sizes set for labels in functional
objects.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
Setting
Scale
2
Sample Text
Attribute
Details
Set the scale for automatically adjusting the font size. The magnification can be set
between 50 and 100 (default: 80).
Display the information on text attributes in the sample display.
5-72
Section 5 Object Operations
5-16 Options
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
3
Setting
Text Attribute
4
Sample
Details
Display the text attributes dialog box by clicking this button. The information on text
attributes set here is displayed as the sample text attributes.
Display as a sample the information after changing automatic adjustment scale or font
attributes.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
1
The font size and text color cannot be changed in the text attributes dialog box. The scale of raster
fonts also cannot be changed. Therefore, font name pull-down menus are not displayed.
2
The following message will be displayed if the screen data being edited has not been saved when
the Label Tab is selected from Tools – Options.
If this screen is displayed for screen data that has already been saved, click the Yes Button and
save the screen data. Click the No Button to return to the Label Tab without saving the screen data.
3
Set the scale level and then click the OK Button in the option dialog box. The following message
will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button to select fitting to the Object Size using the set scale. This setting will apply to
all the functional object labels for which the option Fit the object size is selected.
Sec tion 5
Obj ect Oper ations
5-73
Section 6 Programming Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 6
Programming Macros
Macros are functions that execute extra user-specified programs for projects, screens, and functional objects.
Arithmetic operations, discrimination between conditions, and other functions that are not normally supported
can be added by the user.
6-1 Registering Macros.......................................................................................................................................6-1
6-2 List of Error Messages..................................................................................................................................6-8
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
6-1 Registering Macros
Macros can be registered to projects, screens, and functional objects.
Register the macro by selecting the macro execution conditions and inputting the macro program in
the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
Click the OK Button after editing the macro to execute an error check. When an error is detected, an
error message will be displayed in the error list. Refer to 6-2 List of Error Messages for details on the
messages displayed when errors occur. Macro editing cannot be exited until no errors occur.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
2
Setting
Execution Condition
Program
3
Select Command
4
Error List
Details
Displays the execution conditions for the selected macro.
The field used to input the macro program. Up to 3,000 characters can be input
for one macro.
When a command is selected from the combo box, an explanation of the selected
command will be displayed above the combo box. Click the Insert Button to insert
the selected command in the program input field.
Click the OK Button to display the error messages for the errors detected when
the error check is executed.
When each error in the error list is double-clicked, the cursor will move to the
position in the program input field where the error was detected.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
Refer to the online manual under Macro in the Manual Folder in the NS-Designer Program Folder
for information on macro programming methods. To access the manual, however, the online manual option must be selected when installing the NS-Designer.
6-1
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
6-1-1
Registering Macros to Projects
Use the following procedure to register macros to projects.
1. Select Settings - Project properties.
2. The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Macro Tab.
3. Select from the following four execution conditions.
Macro execution condition
When Loading a Project
On timing Alarm/Event occurred
On timing Alarm/Event is cancelled
When a bit changed/When a value
changed
Description
Executes the macro immediately before loading the first screen after a
project is opened.
Executes the macro when an alarm occurs.
Executes the macro when the alarm is cleared.
Executes the macro when the bit of the specified address turns ON or
OFF or when the value of the word of the specified address changes.
4. Click the Edit Macro Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
5. Input the program and then click the OK Button.
When a Bit Changes
6-2
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
3
Setting
Select
When changing
value
Action timing
Execute when
ON/OFF
Execute when
ON
Execute when
OFF
Details
Selects the bit change macro to set from When a bit changed 1 to When a bit
changed 10.
Causes the bit change macro specified in 1, above, to be executed.
Sets the timing for executing the macro.
Executes the macro when the specified bit turns ON or OFF.
Executes the macro when the specified bit turns ON.
Executes the macro when the specified bit turns OFF.
When a Word Value Changes
No.
1
2
3
4
Setting
Select
Set x when a value
changed
Address
Storage type
Details
Selects the bit change macro to set from When a value changed 1 to When a
value changed 10.
Causes the value change macro specified in 1, above, to be executed.
Specify the communications address to be monitored.
Sets the storage type of the communications address to one of the following 10
types:
INT (signed 1 word)
UINT (unsigned 1 word)
DINT (signed 2 words)
UDINT (unsigned 2 words)
BCD2 (unsigned 1 word)
BCD2 (unsigned 2 words)
BCD1 (signed [leftmost digit: F] 1 word)
BCD1 (signed [leftmost digit: F] 2 words)
BCD2 (signed [leftmost bit: 1] 1 word)
BCD2 (signed [leftmost bit: 1] 2 words)
6-3
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
5
6
Setting
When changing
value
Set value comparison macro
Value = Set
value
Value > Set
value
Value < Set
value
Details
Executes when the value at the communications address changes.
Executes the macro as given below based on comparing the value stored at the
specified address and the set value.
Executes the macro when the value at the specified address equals the set value.
Executes the macro when the value at the specified address is greater than the
set value.
Executes the macro when the value at the specified address is less than the set
value.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the bits/values at specified addresses changed at the same time, macros are executed in the following order.
Case
Macro execution order
Specified addresses for macros turn ON/OFF
at the same time.
Executed in order from When a bit changed 1 to
When a bit changed 10.
The same address is specified for multiple bit
change macros.
Executed in order from When a bit changed 1 to
When a bit changed 10.
The values for specified addresses for macros
change at the same time.
Executed in order from When a value changed 1
to When a value changed 10.
The same address is specified for multiple
value change macros.
Executed in order from When a value changed 1
to When a value changed 10.
The address set for an alarm/event macro
turns ON at the same time as an address for
a bit/value change macro changes.
Executed in order from the trigger macro and then
the alarm/event macro.
Registering Macros to Screens
Use the following procedure to register macros to screens.
1. Select Settings - Screen properties.
2. The Screen Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Macro Tab.
3. Select from the following execution conditions.
6-4
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Macro execution condition
When Loading a Screen
When Unloading a Screen
Description
Executes the macro immediately before displaying the screen after it is
opened.
Executes the macro immediately before the page is switched after closing the
screen.
4. Click the Edit Macro Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
5. Input the program and then click the OK Button.
6-1-2
Registering Macros to Functional Objects
Use the following procedure to register macros to functional objects.
1. Display the Properties Dialog Box for the functional object where the macro is to be registered.
2. Select Display Expansion Tab at the bottom left of the dialog box, and then select the Macro Tab
that is displayed.
3. Select from the following execution conditions. The execution condition depends on the functional
object used.
6-5
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Macro execution condition
Touch ON Timing
Touch OFF Timing
Before Inputting Numeral/
String
Before Writing Numeral/String
When Changing Numeral/
String
When Pressing a Display
Area
When Selecting an
Alarm/Event
When Selecting a List
Description
Executes macro the instant the functional object is pressed.
Executes macro the instant the functional object is released after being
pressed.
Executes the macro immediately before the tenkey and virtual keyboard for
inputting numerals and character strings are displayed.
Executes the macro immediately before the host is notified of the numeral or
character string that was input.
Executes the macro when the value in the address changes.
Executes the macro the instant the alarm display area is pressed.
Executes the macro immediately after selecting each alarm/event that is displayed in the Alarm/Event Summary History field.
Executes the macro immediately after selecting a line from the list selection
objects.
4. Click the Edit Macro Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
5. Input the program and then click the OK Button.
6-6
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-1 Registering Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The execution conditions that can be selected for each functional object are shown in the following table.
Functional object
ON/OFF Buttons
Word Buttons
Command Buttons
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Numeral Displays & Inputs
String Displays & Inputs
Thumbwheel switches
Text
List Selection
Level Meter
Broken-line Graph
Bitmap
Analogue Meter
Video Display
Date
Time
Data Log Graph
Data Block Table
Temporary Input
Touch
ON
Timing
Touch
OFF
Timing
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
When
Changing
Numeral/
String
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Before
Inputting
Numeral/
String
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Before
Writing
Numeral/
String
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
When
Selecting
a List
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Alarm/Event Objects
Functional object
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary & History
When Pressing a Display Area
Yes
No
6-7
When Selecting an Alarm/Event
No
Yes
Section 6 Programming Macros
6-2 List of Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
6-2 List of Error Messages
The following table shows the details of error messages that are displayed in the Error List field after
executing an error check.
Error message
Format error
Variable name error
( is missing
No. of ( ) does not agree
Position of , is incorrect
Function argument error
= command error
End of program is incomplete
If sentence error
, or ; is missing
FOR sentence error
Details
The program contains elements other than variable name, function name, or
programming that cannot be interpreted.
A variable name is incorrect.
The ( (left parentheses symbol) is missing from a function or sentence.
The number of ( ) (parentheses) in the program do not agree.
The position of the , (comma) in the program is incorrect.
The program contains an incorrect function argument, such as word memory
being set in a position that permits bit memory only. Check the arguments
that can be set by referring to 2-1 Function Argument Table in the NS12
Macro Reference included on the NS-Designer CD-ROM.
The program contains an incorrect substitution statement, such as 3=10 or
$B0=3.
The program that was input is incomplete.
The program contains an incorrect IF, ELSE, or ENDIF statement.
The , (comma) after the function argument is missing or the program is not
divided using a ; (semicolon).
A value outside the range 0 to 32767 is set for n in a FOR (n) statement, or
FOR is nested to more than 1 level.
6-8
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 7
System Settings
This section describes how to set the PT’s operating parameters and address allocations.
7-1 Settings .........................................................................................................................................................7-1
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
7-1-1
Common Procedure
Select Settings - System Setting. The System Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
7-1-2
PT Operations
Click the PT Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
1
Setting
Startup Wait Time
2
Key Press Sound
3
Buzzer Sound
Details
Set the time required before the PT starts communicating with external devices after turning ON the power or resetting the PT. The startup waiting
time can be set to between 0 and 10 (unit: s).
Select whether an input sound will be heard when an object is pressed.
ON: Input sound enabled
OFF: Input sound disabled
Select whether a buzzer will be heard.
ON:
The buzzer is enabled at the following times:
• When system memory bits $SB12 to $SB14 are ON
• When an error occurs in the PT
• When a message is displayed for the “×” and “!” icons
OFF:
The buzzer is disabled
ERROR ON:
The buzzer is enabled at the following times:
• When an error occurs in the PT
4
5
Screen Saver
Screen Saver
Movement
Screen Saver
Startup Time
Device Monitor
Changing Value
• When a message is displayed for the “×” and “!” icons
Set the various screen saver settings.
Select one of the following screen saver operations.
Display Erased: Erases the screen when it is idle for a specified time.
OFF:
Disables the screen saver.
Set the amount of time after which the screen saver will start up. The time
can be set to between 1 and 255 (unit: s).
Set whether to enable or disable changing monitor values for addresses
displayed on the device monitor screen on the PT.
Enable: Monitor value can be changed.
Disable: Monitor value cannot be changed.
7-1
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
6
7-1-3
Setting
Prioritize notification
of ON/OFF Button
Details
Select to prioritize notification of ON/OFF Button notification.
Initial
Click the Initial Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
Initial Screen
System Memory
$SB
Allocation Address
$SW
Allocation Address
Options
$SB, $SW Update Cycle
Intervals of RUN
Signal (Pulse)
System Memory
List Button
Memory Card Free
Space Check Flag
Details
Select the initial screen to be displayed when the PT starts operation.
Set the addresses where system memory is allocated.
System bit memory can be allocated in the PLC (host) memory area or in $B. Set
the address to a multiple of 16. When $SB is allocated as host memory, the bit
number is not set.
A total of 53 bits of bit memory starting from the specified address will be used as
system memory.
Example: If Serial A is set to DM 00000, the correspondence with $SB is as follows:
$SB0
Serial A: DM 00000.00
$SB1
Serial A: DM 00000.01
to
$SB52
Serial A: DM 00003.04
System word memory can be allocated in the PLC (host) memory area or in $W.
A total of 39 words of word memory starting from the specified address are used as
system memory.
Set the system memory update cycle and RUN signal (pulse) interval.
Set the update cycle for $SB and $SW. The cycle can be set to between 1 and 256.
Set the communications interval for writing RUN signals. The interval can be set to
between 1 and 256.
Click the System Memory List Button to display the System Memory List.
Set the amount of free space on the Memory Card for which to issue an alarm. If the
free space on the Memory Card inserted in the PT is at or below the amount of free
space set here, $SB48 will turn ON.
7-2
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Set internal memory for both $SB and $SW allocation addresses or set the same host address for
both for them.
Example $SB:
Serial A: 00000
$SW:
Serial A: DM 00000
Set the same host name (Serial A) for both $SB and $SW.
♦ TIM, CNT, TK, TU, and CU cannot be allocated for $SB.
♦ TK, TU, and CU cannot be allocated for $SW.
♦ Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS Series Programming Manual for details on the system
memory.
♦ When changing the settings on the Comm-All Tab Page for whether the communications port, the
Ethernet, and Controller Link are used, close the System Setting Dialog Box before setting the host
address in $SB or $SW.
$SB, $SW Update Cycle
Data is updated between $SB/$SW and the allocated addresses each time the number of communications cycles specified in the $SB, $SW Update Cycle field is processed.
Example: When the $SB, $SW Update Cycle is set to three cycles.
1
2
3
Updating
$SB/$SW
1
2
3
Updating
$SB/$SW
Communications cycle
(time for all required
communications to
complete one cycle.)
Communications cycle
(time for all required
communications to
complete one cycle.)
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The $SB and $SW are also updated when a project starts loading, switching base screens, opening
or closing pop-up screens, and switching frames. After updating during these operations, updating
is performed according to the setting in the $SB, $SW Update Cycle field.
RUN Signal Pulse Interval
The RUN signal ($SB0, $SB1) is output after $SB and $SW are refreshed the number of times set for
the RUN Signal Pulse Interval.
Example: The following illustration is for when the RUN Signal Pulse Interval is set to 3.
1
$SB and $SW
refreshed
2
$SB and $SW
refreshed
Communications cycle (All
required communications
completed once.)
3
$SB and $SW
refreshed
RUN Signal output.
7-3
1
$SB and $SW
refreshed
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Initial Value for System Memory
Click the System Memory List Button on the Initial Tab Page to display the Initial Value for System
Memory Dialog Box.
The $SB and $SW can be set to communicate with the PLC allocation addresses set in the Initial Tab
Page.
$SB and $SW addresses are divided into functional groups, and the user can select the groups for
which to perform communications. By selecting items, communications will be performed between the
selected area and the PLC address.
The default setting is for only Screen (communications with $SW0). Change the settings as required.
The above setting example is set for communications as follows:
$SW0
Serial A: DM 01000
$SW10 to $SW13 Serial A: DM 01010 to DM 01013
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The $SB bits and $SW words that are not selected in the Initial Value for the System Memory Dialog Box are set to not communicate with the PLC, and can be used. (When bits and words are not
selected, it does not indicate that their use is prohibited.)
7-1-4
History
Click the History Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
7-4
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
Use Ring Buffer
3
Character Code for
Log File
Logfile Output
Format
Save the data with
offset time display
format
4
5
7-1-5
Setting
Number of Operation Log Records
Details
Set the number of logging records to be saved in a single file. The number of records can be set to between 0 and 1,024.
Set to 0 if it is not necessary to save records.
Select to record data in a ring buffer. When this setting is selected, if the maximum number of items is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is
recorded. When this setting is not selected, no more data will be recorded once
the set maximum is reached.
Select the character code (ASCII or Unicode) for alarm/event histories, data logs,
operation logs, and error logs.
Set the format for outputting the data log to a CSV file.
Select to display the time as an offset when outputting log data from the data log
to a CSV file.
Comm-All
This tab page is used to set the communications destination. Click the Comm-All Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7-5
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
Setting
Serial Port A
2
Serial Port B
3
Communicate with
an expansion
interface
Ethernet
4
Controller Link
5
Comm. Time Out
6
Retry Counts
7
8
Routing Table Setting
Comm. Auto-return
9
Comm. Details Button
Details
Select None, PLC, Bar-Code Reader, Temperature Controller, Memory Link, or Modem for
Data Transfer for the communications destination.
One bar code can be set for each project.
Select None, PLC, Bar-Code Reader, Temperature Controller, Memory Link, or Modem for
Data Transfer for the communications destination.
One bar code can be set for each project.
Select this option when using an Expansion Interface for serial communications (NS5 only).
This option is for future expansion only. Do not normally select it.
Select whether Ethernet will be used.
Disabled: Ethernet communications not used.
Enabled: Ethernet communications used.
Select whether Controller Link will be used.
Disabled: Controller Link communications not used.
Enabled: Controller Link communications used.
Sets the time for the timeout error when a response is not received from the host. The timeout monitor time can be set to between 1 and 10 (unit: s).
Set the number of communications retries before an error screen will be displayed when a
communications error occurs while communicating with the host. If communications are
unsuccessful after the number of communications retries specified in this setting have been
executed, processing set for communications auto-recovery under Comm. Auto-return will
be executed.
The number of retries can be set to between 0 and 255 times.
Click the Routing Table Setting Button to display the Routing Table Setting Dialog Box.
Select whether or not to use communications auto-recovery.
Yes: Retries communications when a communications error occurs, without displaying the
Error Message Dialog Box.
No: Displays the Error Message Dialog Box when a communications error occurs. Click the
OK Button in the Error Message Dialog Box to retry communications.
Click this button to display a dialog box for making advanced communications settings.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ To change the communications port setting, the screen data must be changed.
Example: Changing from using serial port A only to serial port B.
1. Click the Comm-All Tab in the System Setting Dialog Box, and change None to PLC for serial
port B (leave the serial port A set to PLC).
The host is registered automatically under these conditions. (The default host name is Serial B.)
2. When creating functional objects that will communicate with the PLC connected to serial port B,
set the host name to Serial B and set the address.
When changing the communications destination of the existing functional objects to the PLC
connected to serial port B, change the host name from Serial A (default host name when using
serial port A) to Serial B.
Functions such as Replace (refer to 5-4 Editing) and Change Settings at Once (refer to 5-10
Batch Settings) are useful here. Settings can be changed efficiently by using the Import CSV File
and Export CSV File functions (refer to Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files).
When the Import/Export CSV File functions are used, the whole file is exported to a CSV file,
after which the exported file can be opened and functions such as Replace can be used to
change Serial A to Serial B. (Indirect addresses and other data are not included in the CSV file.
The allocations for these data must be changed separately using the NS-Designer.)
3. When serial port A is not used, click the Comm-All Tab in the System Setting Dialog Box, and
change the serial port A setting from PLC to None.
7-6
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
♦ When the settings for whether the communications ports are used have been changed, close the
System Setting Dialog Box before setting the host address in $SB or $SW. Until the System Setting
Dialog Box is closed, the settings that existed prior to the changes are still enabled, and the new
host setting cannot be specified in the system memory allocation addresses.
Setting Routing Tables
Click the Routing Table Button on the Comm. All Tab Page to display the Routing Table Setting Dialog
Box.
The routing tables consist of a local network table and remote network table. Routing tables are required to use messages on a Controller Link Network.
Local PT
Communications path
7-7
Communications
partner
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Local Network Table
The local network table is shown on the left side of the Routing Table Setting Dialog Box. The setting
for Serial Port A, Serial Port B, Ethernet, and Controller Link Tabs are shown.
Number
1
Setting
NTLK0
Details
Information for serial port A is shown. The unit number and
local network address are fixed.
• Unit number: 34
• Local network address: 111
2
NTLK1
Information for serial port B is shown. The unit number and
local network address are fixed.
• Unit number: 39
• Local network address112
3
ETN
Information for Ethernet is shown. The unit number is fixed.
• Unit number: 17
• Local network address: The number set on the Ethernet Tab
Page is shown.
4
CLK
Information for Controller link is shown. The unit number is
fixed.
• Unit number: 18
• Local network address: The number set on the Controller Link
Tab Page is shown.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Close the System Setting Dialog Box after changing the settings on the Comm-All Tab Page for
whether communications ports are used, or after changing settings on the Ethernet or Controller
Link Tab Pages. The previous setting will remain until the dialog box has been closed.
7-8
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Remote Network Table
The remote network table provides the node and network address corresponding to the initial relay
point (first point the data must pass) en route to a target network (end network) not directly connected
to the local PLC. The table specifies the route from the relay point to the end network.
Relay PLC (b)
Relay PLC (a)
Local PT
Network 1
Network 2
Destination
Network 3
1
2
3
Number
1
2
Setting
Details
Destination Network
Address
Remote Network
Address
Set the target network address. When the target is on the
local network, this setting is not required.
Set the network address of the first point on the way to
the target network. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.
Set the node address of the first relay point on the way to
the target network. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.
Gateway Node Address
3
The following diagram shows an example of a system connection and its routing tables.
Node 1
Node 2
Node 2
Node 3
Relay PLC
(a)
PT at local node
Node 1
Network 1
Relay Network Table
for Local PT
Destination
network
address
3
Gateway
node
address
1
3
Meaning: To go to network 3,
first go to node 3 of network 1.
Node 1
Destination
network
address
3
Network 3
Relay Network Table
for PLC (b)
Relay
network
address
Gateway
node
address
2
2
Meaning: To go to network 3,
first go to node 2 of network 2.
7-9
Destination
network
address
1
Node 2
Destination
Network 2
Relay Network Table
for PLC (a)
Relay
network
address
Relay PLC
(b)
Relay Network Table
for Destination Node
Relay
network
address
Gateway
node
address
2
1
Meaning: To go to network 1,
first go to node 1 of network 2.
Destination
network
address
1
Relay
network
address
Gateway
node
address
3
1
Meaning: To go to network 1,
first go to node 1 of network 3.
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Comm. Details
The Comm. Details Dialog Box will be displayed if the Comm. Details Button is clicked on the CommAll Tab page.
Set the interval of message communications, i.e., the time from starting all communications required
on the screen until the next communications are started. The interval can be set to between 2 and 200
ms.
The following examples illustrate operation when the interval set here differs from the time required for
actual communications.
Example: Actual Communications Longer than Set Interval
Message
communications interval
(setting)
Actual
communications interval
All communications are completed before
starting communications again.
Example: Actual Communications Shorter than Set Interval
Message
communications interval
(setting)
Actual
communications interval
Communications are not started again
until the set interval has expired.
7-1-6
Detailed
The advanced settings are used to set the details of the communications method selected from the Comm-All
Tab Page.
7-10
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Serial Port A and Serial Port B
Select PLC or Bar-Code Reader under Serial Port A or Serial Port B in the Comm-All Tab Page to enable the Serial Port A Tab Page or Serial Port B Tab Page.
When Communications Destination Is Set to PLC:
1
2
3
No.
1
2
Setting
Protocol
Comm. Speed
Details
Select the protocol from 1: 1 NT Link, 1: N NT Link, or Host Link.
Using both serial ports A and B
Supported/not supported
1: 1 NT Link + 1: 1 NT Links
Supported
1: 1 NT Link + 1: N NT Links
Supported
1: N NT Links + 1: N NT Links
Supported
Select the communications speed. The communications speed range depends on the
protocol setting. Refer to the following table for applicable ranges.
Protocol
Transfer speed selection range
1: N NT Links
3
NT Link (1: N)
Unit No.
Normal or high-speed
1: 1 NT Link
No settings
Host Link
9,600 or 19,200 bps
Select the unit number for the 1: N NT Link from 0 to 7. When a 1: 1 NT Link is selected as the protocol, this setting is not required.
7-11
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
When Communications Destination Is Set to Bar-Code Reader:
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Setting
Details
1
2
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Select the data bit length for the bar code reader from 7 or 8 bits.
Select the data stop bit length for the bar code reader from 1 or 2 bits.
3
Parity
Select the data parity bits for the bar code reader from none, even, or odd.
4
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate for communications with the bar code reader from 4,800, 9,600, or
19,200 bps.
5
BCR Input
6
Continuous
Input
Select the confirmation method used after inputting data in the input column from the
following options.
Auto:
Automatically confirms data when it is read from the bar code reader.
Manual: Confirms data when the Enter Key is pressed. Data and character strings can
be added.
Set whether to move focus to the next object when confirming bar code inputs. This setting can be enabled when BCR Input is set to Auto.
Ethernet
Click the Ethernet Tab.
6
1
2
3
4
5
7-12
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
Setting
Network Address.
Node Address
3
UDP Port No.
4
IP Address
IP Address
Sub-net
Mask
Default
Gateway
IP Proxy
Address
5
6
Conversion
Table
LAN Speed
Details
Set the network number of the Ethernet network to which the PT is connected. The
number can be set between 1 and 127.
Set the node address of the PT in the Ethernet network. The address can be set between 1 and 254.
Set the UDP port number to be used. The number can be set between 1024 and
65535.
Set the IP address of the Ethernet to which the PT is connected.
The IP address can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Set the subnet mask of the Ethernet to which the PT is connected.
The subnet mask can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Set the IP router for communications with other networks.
The default gateway can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Set the IP address or IP proxy address of the transmission destination for Ethernet
communications.
Set the address between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Create the conversion table converting FINS node addresses to IP addresses for
Ethernet communications. Up to 32 address combinations can be registered.
Procedure
• Adding Settings
1. Click the Add Button to display the following dialog box.
2. Set the node address and the IP address to be converted to, and then click the
OK Button. The setting range is as follows:
Node address: 1 to 253
IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
• Editing or Deleting Settings
Select the setting to be edited or deleted.
Click the Edit Button or the Delete Button.
Select the method for setting the Ethernet speed from 10/100BASE-T Auto Switch or
10BASE-T Fixed.
7-13
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Controller Link
Click the Controller Link Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
No.
Setting
1
Network Address
2
Node Address
3
4
Comm. Speed
Data Link Table
Setting
Read Status
5
Details
Set the network number of the Controller Link Network to which the PT is
connected. The number can be set between 1 and 127.
Set the node number of the PT on the Controller Link Network. The number can be set between 1 and 32.
Select the baud rate from 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.
Click the Data Link Table Setting Button to display the Data Link Table
Setting Dialog Box. .Refer to page 7-14 for details.
Set whether the Controller Link Status is read and set the address to which
status is read. The address can be set to between $B0 and $B 32336.
Setting Data Link Tables
Data Link tables show the way that data is linked. Data link tables can be set using Controller Link
Support Software or the CX-Net (Network Setting Tool). The data link tables can only be specified on
the NS-Designer.
Click the Data Link Table Setting Button to display the Data Link Table Setting Dialog Box.
1
2
7-14
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Number
1
Details
Display whether the Data Link Tables exist in the folder storing the project file.
Examples: No Data Link Tables:
Data Link Table exists:
2
Used to select the Data Link Table file. A file name with extension .cl3 must be set. Click the Browse Button and
select the Data Link Table file. The specified Data Link Table will be resaved as ClkDLink.cl3 in the project folder.
N
Noottee
♦ Delete the data link tables from any node that is not participating in the data links.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
•
Any file name can be set when creating data link tables using Controller Link Support Software
or CX-Net. Specifying Data Link Tables in the Data Link Table Setting Dialog Box on NSDesigner. The file will be saved as ClkDLink.cl3 in the project folder.
•
Data link tables can be set via a network. Set data link tables in the Controller Link I/F Unit using CX-Net or Controller Link Support Software. Data Link Tables are not set in NS-Designer.
Setting data link tables via a network can be used to change data link tables.
•
When setting data link tables on the NS-Designer, the data link tables cannot be changed via
network. If the user attempt to change the settings of data link tables using Controller Link
Support Software or CX-Net, the settings in NS-Designer will remain. For this reason, projects
and setting files must be re-transferred to the PT when changing data link tables.
Read Status
Status indicates the operating status (network status), such as error information in the Controller Link
network and node participation status, and operating status (data link status). Reading the status
makes it possible to check whether an error has occurred and whether the machine is operating correctly.
When any $B address within the range is set in the Status Allocation Address, the address will be the
start address of 27 consecutive addresses to which status will be read. Refer to the Operation Manual
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status for details on the allocation addresses.
7-15
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1-7
Printer
Select the Printer Tab Page.
1
2
3
Number
1
Setting
Printer Type
2
Mode
3
Orientation
Details
Select either ESC/P Raster or BJ Raster as the printer’s control
method.
Select from the following:
• Color
• Monochrome
• Monochrome (inverse)
Select to change the orientation of the paper.
• Portrait
• Landscape
7-16
Section 7 System Settings
7-1 Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1-8
Video
Select the Video Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
Number
1
2
Setting
Video Board
Color which fills blank
channels
Details
Select the type of Video board to be installed in the PT. If this
setting is changed, conversion processing will be executed for
projects currently being edited.
Set when using an NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit. If the
same color set in the video display color is set for graphics such
as functional objects, the part overlapping the video display objects will be displayed as a video image and other parts will be
displayed in black.
Color to fill the rectangle
is set to the same color
as the video display.
Video display object
Graphic (rectangle)
The section that overlaps the video
image is displayed as a transparent
image. The section outside the
boundary of the video image is
displayed in black.
Graphic (rectangle)
3
Video Input Method
4
Save in a file if memory card is full
Select the input method for video signals. This setting is used
for all video input from the video card.
Set the action to perform if the Memory Card is full when capturing video images using system memory.
Update: If the same file name exists, delete the oldest file and
save the newer file.
Stop: The file will not be saved.
7-17
Section 8 Testing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 8
Testing
This section describes the test execution methods and test tool.
8-1 Test Function ................................................................................................................................................8-1
8-2 Test Tool.......................................................................................................................................................8-6
Section 8 Testing
8-1 Test Function
NS-Designer Operation Manual
8-1 Test Function
The test function is used to manipulate data created on screen in the NS-Designer to check screen
data operation without transferring data to the PT.
Pressing buttons, changing addresses, and operating and displaying functional objects can be tested
without the PT being used.
Executing Tests
1. Save projects and screens before executing a test.
2. Select Tools - Test.
The Test Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Set the options for executing the test.
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Minimize NSDesigner
Start Test from
Current Screen
Details
Select to minimize the NS-Designer during test execution.
Select to start the test from the screen currently at the front of the NS-Designer.
When this setting is not selected, the test will start from the Initial Screen setting in
the Initial Tab Page located under Settings - System Setting.
4. Click the Start Button to start up the test function and start the test.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If projects and screens are not saved before a test is executed, a dialog box will be displayed confirming whether to save data when Tools - Test is selected. Save data before executing a test.
Test Screen
The test screen and test tool is started up when a test is executed. The test screen is first displayed
with the set screen size.
Test screen
Test tool
8-1
Section 8 Testing
8-1 Test Function
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Switching Screen Display and Style
By double-clicking a position on the test screen where no function is located, the screen display
and style can be switched using the following procedure. The settings can also be switched from
the View Menu.
Show title bar,
hide menu bar
Hide title bar,
hide menu bar
Hide title bar,
show menu bar
Full screen
display
Show title bar,
show menu bar
Selecting a Screen
Select File - Select page, and display the required screen by selecting it from the Select Page
Dialog Box.
Function List
The functions in each menu of the test screen are as follows:
File Menu
Menu item
Select Project
Select Screen
Exit
Function
Select the project to be tested.
Select the screen to be displayed.
Exit the test.
View Menu
Menu item
Title
Menu
Full Screen
Function
Select whether to display or hide the test screen title bar.
Select whether to display or hide the test screen menu bar.
Switch the test screen to full screen display mode.
Option Menu
Menu item
Input mode
Caption mode
About product information
Function
Select the input mode for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input
from keypad or external device (such as keyboard).
While external device is selected, the menu item is displayed with a check
mark.
Select whether to display labels or show addresses.
(This function is the same as that selected under the NS-Designer View Show Address.)
While Show Address is selected, the menu item is displayed with a check
mark.
Displays information on the product.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.
Exiting Tests
Ends the test screen and test tool.
1. Use one of the following operations to end the test.
• Select File - Exit.
• Click the
Button at the top right of the window.
• Double-click the test mode icon at the top left of the window.
8-2
Section 8 Testing
8-1 Test Function
NS-Designer Operation Manual
• Click the test mode icon at the top left of the window, and select Close from the Control Menu
Box that is displayed.
• Press the Alt + F4 Keys.
2. A dialog box confirming whether to exit the test will be displayed. Click the Yes Button to exit the
test.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When the menu bar is not displayed in the test screen, double-click on the test screen until the
menu bar is displayed.
Test Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to testing. The tests operate differently from PT operations.
1
Changing Date and Time
Date and time settings cannot be changed when using the test function, even if a new date or time
is input using the date and time functional objects.
2. Flicker Display Color
When flicker is performed in test mode, the inverse display color may differ from the color displayed
at the PT.
3. $SB and $SW Operations
In test mode, operations can be checked for the following system memory bits and words only.
When checking operations, change the $SB and $SW values directly.
Changes to other system memory values will not be processed.
Offset
+19
+33
+36
+38
+39
+40
+41
+45
+46
+47
+52
$SB
Details
Prohibit Input
Save Alarm/Event History
Save Data Log
Save Operation Log
Log Functional Object Operation
Log Switch Screen Operation
Log Macro Operation
Macro Error Dialog Control
Notification of Macro Error
Logging Process Error Flag
Data Block Operation Complete Flag
Offset
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+13
+18
+19
+20
+21
+23
+24
+25
+26
8-3
$SW
Details
Current Screen No.
Current Pop-up Screen 1 No.
Position of Pop-up Screen 1 (X)
Position of Pop-up Screen 1 (Y)
Current Pop-up Screen 2 No.
Position of Pop-up Screen 2 (X)
Position of Pop-up Screen 2 (Y)
Current Pop-up Screen 3 No.
Position of Pop-up Screen 3 (X)
Position of Pop-up Screen 3 (Y)
Current Label No.
Password No. for Canceling Input Prohibition
No. of Alarms/Events Occurred
Occurred Alarm/Event ID
Cancelled Alarm/Event ID
Alarm/Event ID of Alarm/Event Object Macro
Macro Error No.
Screen Number Having Macro Error
Object ID Having Macro Error
Macro Timing Having Error
Section 8 Testing
8-1 Test Function
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Offset
$SB
Details
Offset
+27
+28
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
$SW
Details
Offset Value for Index 10
Offset Value for Index 11
Offset Value for Index 12
Offset Value for Index 13
Offset Value for Index 14
Offset Value for Index 15
Offset Value for Index 16
Offset Value for Index 17
Offset Value for Index 18
Offset Value for Index 19
Data Log Group Number
Data Block Error Number
4. $SB and $SW Address Allocations
Communications are not performed between allocated addresses and $SB or $SW.
For example, when communications are set between $SW0 and DM 00000:
• Even if the value of $SW0 is changed, DM 00000 will not change.
• Even if the value of DM 00000 is changed, $SW0 will not change.
5. Input Dialog
The format of the following input dialogs is different from that used by the PT.
• Each type of keypad displayed when inputting Numeral Display & Input.
• Each type of keypad displayed when inputting String Display & Input.
• Date Setting Dialog Boxes displayed when inputting date settings.
• Time Setting Dialog Boxes displayed when inputting time settings.
• Password Input Dialog Boxes and virtual keyboards that are displayed when inputting passwords.
Also, the PT can display two types of keypads (with and without a temporary input), but in test
mode only the keypads without a temporary input can be displayed.
6. Video Display Object
Video images are not displayed in test mode. The display area for a video display will be gray-out
instead. The display will also be different if other objects overlap the video display object or a dialog
box is displayed.
7.
• PT:
The video display object will be displayed on top and any objects overlapping it will
not be displayed. The video display object will disappear temporarily if an error dialog box, write confirmation box, etc., is displayed. The video image will return when
the dialog box is closed.
• Test mode:
Function objects are display on top of the video display object.
Command Buttons
The following command button functions will not work in test mode.
• Video controls - Video capture
• Video controls - Contrast adjustment
• Video controls - Vision Sensor Console output
8. Pop-up Menus
Pop-up menus for word buttons, command buttons, and text display and input objects will be different from those on the PT.
• PT:
A scroll bar will appear on the right of the menu when there are more than 10 items on
the menu.
• Test mode: All menu items will be displayed at the same time even if there are more than 10
items.
8-4
Section 8 Testing
8-1 Test Function
NS-Designer Operation Manual
9. Log Data File for Data Log
In test mode, only one log data file will be saved for each group. On the PT, up to 999 log data files
will be saved for each group. If, however, the output file name that is set is 6 characters or longer,
only up to 99 log data files will be saved. The log data file names are as shown in the following table.
PT/Test mode
Log data file names
Details
PT
Trd#∗.CSV (default)
# : 00 to 99, indicating data log groups 1 to 100.
∗ : 001 to 999. The largest current number will be
incremented by 1 to when the data is saved.
Test mode
Trd#.CSV (default)
# : 0 to 99, indicating data log groups 1 to 100.
10. Reading/Writing Data Block Data Files
Reading and writing data block files is different.
• PT:
The read/write location for data files can be set to either the PT or the Memory Card
(only when display a confirmation dialog box is set).
• Test mode: The read/write location for data files cannot be set and the operation is performed directly on the CSV data file set for the Register Data Block. To test writing a data file,
make a CSV data file backup in advance to transfer to the PT.
Refer to 2-16 Data Blocks in the Programming Manual for details.
11. Displaying Data Block Table Data
Operation is different when editing data block tables.
• PT:
Even if values are edited in the data block table, the previous values will be displayed
after the screen is switched unless the data file is written.
• Test mode: Values edited in the data block table will be displayed after the screen is switched
even if the data file is not written. The data file must be read to return to the previous
values.
Refer to 2-16 Data Blocks in the Programming Manual for details.
12. System Language
The system language cannot be changed in test mode. The language set for the OS of the computer will be displayed.
8-5
Section 8 Testing
8-2 Test Tool
NS-Designer Operation Manual
8-2 Test Tool
The test tool is used to display a list of addresses set in the functional objects, and to change address
values and monitor address status without actual communications being performed with external devices.
Executes each menu bar test tool function.
Displays the current address values.
The addresses set for the functional objects of the
currently displayed screen are displayed in sorted
order. For each new screen displayed, the
addresses set for the functional objects of the
screen are added to the display.
8-2-1
Display Formats
The test tool can be used to switch the display as follows:
Changing Display
The display format of addresses can be selected from the following five settings.
• Decimal (signed)
• Octal
• Decimal (unsigned)
•Binary
• Hexadecimal
Procedure
• Select the display format from View - Display.
• Select the format from the Display Format Combo Box.
Display Contents
Select the address displayed in the test tool from the following 3 options.
• Bit device (bit addresses only)
• Word device (word addresses only)
• All (all addresses set in the functional object)
Procedure
• Select the display contents from View - Contents.
• Select the display contents from the Contents Combo Box.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The display format and contents can also be switched from the pop-up menu that is displayed by
clicking the right mouse button in the address list field.
8-6
Section 8 Testing
8-2 Test Tool
NS-Designer Operation Manual
8-2-2
Setting Values
Use the following procedure with the test tool to change address values set in functional objects.
Select the address to be changed and double-click on it or click the Set Value Button.
Double-click the
selected item or click
the Set Value Button.
The Set Value Dialog Box will be displayed.
Bit Addresses
Click the SET Button to write 1 to the address.
Click the RESET Button to write 0 to the address.
Word Addresses
Input the value to be written and then click the OK Button.
The
symbol will change to
for the address that has had a value changed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Set Display to Hexadecimal to input BCD formats.
Example:
To input –12 as BCD1 (1-word, signed (most significant digit: F)), input F012.
If Display is not set to Hexadecimal, input the value converted to the required display format.
Example:
To input –12 as BCD1 (1-word, signed (most significant digit: F)), input the converted value –4,078
in INT.
Refer to 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions in the NS Series Programming Manual for details on storage formats.
♦ The values can also be set from the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button in the address list field.
8-7
Section 8 Testing
8-2 Test Tool
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Always on Top
The setting for whether to display the test tool on top can be switched under Options - Always on Top.
While the setting for displaying the test tool on top is selected, the menu item will be displayed with a
check mark.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The default setting is for the test tool to be always displayed on top.
8-8
Section 9 Validation
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 9
Validation
This section explains the functions used for checking that screen data is correct and displaying a list of errors,
based on the validation settings.
9-1 Validation Settings........................................................................................................................................9-1
9-2 Validation Results.........................................................................................................................................9-2
9-3 List of Validation Items ................................................................................................................................9-4
Section 9 Validation
9-1 Validation Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
9-1 Validation Settings
1. Select Tools - Validation.
2. The Validation Dialog Box will be displayed.
Set each item and then click the OK Button.
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Check When
After pressing OK
button
Before saving
screens
Open error screen
after validation
Check What
Details
Set the range and timing for executing validation.
Click the OK Button in the Validation Dialog Box to execute the validation.
Select the range for executing the validation from either the front screen page
only or the whole project.
When saving a screen, validation is executed before the screen is saved. Validation is executed for the front screen only.
Select this setting to display detected errors after the validation has been completed.
Select the items to be checked for errors.
Refer to 9-3 List of Validation Items for details.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Even if the Detect incorrect address item is selected and Current Screen is selected for the range,
addresses for the following items will not be checked. If Whole Project is selected for the range and
the Detect Incorrect Address item is executed, Jump cannot be performed from the validation result
to the following addresses.
Flicker settings; Data log settings; System settings; Alarm/event settings; Data block settings; Project Properties - Macro; Screen Properties - Macro
9-1
Section 9 Validation
9-2 Validation Results
NS-Designer Operation Manual
9-2 Validation Results
9-2-1
No Error Detected
• When Validation Is Performed with After pressing OK button Selected:
The following dialog box will be displayed after executing validation.
• When Validation Is Performed with Before saving screens Selected:
The screen will be saved after executing validation. A dialog box is not displayed when this method is
used.
9-2-2
Error Detected
The Validation Result Dialog Box is displayed after executing validation.
Displays information for objects that
were detected with errors.
Executes validation again and displays
the most recent data.
Select the error from the validation results and click the Jump Button, or double-click on the selected
line. The corresponding object or screen will be displayed. When the error occurred in an object, boxes
(g) will flash.
Select and click the
Jump
Button
or
double-click on the
selected line.
The black squares
will flash.
9-2
Section 9 Validation
9-2 Validation Results
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The Validation Result Dialog Box will remain open until the Close Button or the Close Button ( )
at the top right of the dialog box is clicked.
The Validation Result Dialog Box can be reopened after closing by selecting Tools - Validation
Result or clicking the Validation Result Button.
Toolbar
9-3
Section 9 Validation
9-3 List of Validation Items
NS-Designer Operation Manual
9-3 List of Validation Items
Error No.
1
Item
Detect incorrect addresses
2
Detect unset addresses
3
Check if a screen switch
object exists on each
screen
Check if screen switch
destination exists
Check if specified files
(bmp/txt etc.) exist
5
6
8
9
10
Detect overlapping functional objects
Check if functional objects are created inside
screen/frame area
Check if touch points are
included in functional
objects
Details
Checks whether the address formats are incorrect or whether the addresses are set outside the specified range. Alarm/event, data log,
data block, and system memory allocation addresses, however, are
not checked.
Searches for functional objects and frames that have not been allocated addresses.
Checks whether screen switch objects operated by Command Buttons
exist on each screen.
Checks whether the screen switch destination specified by the screen
switch command button exists.
Checks whether files (BMP files, JPEG files, TXT files, or LST files)
set in functional objects exist in the screen folder. The screen folder is
a folder located one level below the project file. The folder is automatically created with the same name as the project.
Checks whether the positions of functional objects are overlapping.
Checks whether objects are positioned in areas that are not displayed
when the PT is running, or whether the objects in frames are positioned outside the frame area.
Checks whether the functional objects are positioned above the touch
points. When used to check pop-up screens, this setting is used to
detect functional objects that have a width or height that is smaller
than the mesh size of the touch panel. The touch panel mesh size is
16 × 16 dots for NS12, NS10, and NS5, and 20 × 20 dots for NS8.
9-4
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 10
Transferring Data
This section explains how to transfer screen data that has been created or edited to and from the PT, and how to
retrieve registered data from the PT.
10-1
10-2
10-3
Transferring Data to the PT....................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card ....................................................................................................... 10-29
Data Transfer Using SPMA..................................................................................................................................... 10-33
Note: Do not perform the following operations while downloading or uploading project data or the system program. The data may be damaged.
Turn OFF the power to the PT.
Press the PT reset switch.
If project data or the system program is damaged by turning OFF the power when writing files, it may not
be possible to replace the system program using a normal data transfer. If project data is damaged, format
the screen data areas using the system menu of the PT. Refer to 6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format in the
NS Series Setup Manual for details on formatting screen data areas. Refer to 3-6-3 Transferring Data with
Memory Cards – Errors in the NS Series Setup Manual to replace the System Program.
Do not download a system program earlier than version 6.2 to an NS5-V2 PT. Refer to 3-6-3 Transferring
Data with Memory Cards – Errors in the NS Series Setup Manual for information on updating and recovering the system program.
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
There are two methods for transferring data between a PT and the NS-Designer (personal computer):
• Transferring data to the PT
• Transferring data to a Memory Card inserted into the PT.
These methods can be used in the following cases.
• Installing the System in the PT.
Transferring data to
the PT
• Transferring a project, screen data, and setting file to the PT.
• Transferring the project data stored in the PT to the personal computer.
• Transferring data to a Memory Card.
Transferring data to
a Memory Card inserted into the PT.
• Transferring the data stored in the memory card (data logs, alarm histories, data
blocks, etc.) to the personal computer.
• Deleting files stored on the Memory Card.
• Creating/Deleting folders.
Download
Upload
Transferring data using a Memory
Card inserted into the computer running NS-Designer and the PT.
Memory Card
PT
• Files
• Creating folders remotely
• System
• Project
• Screens
• Setting files
Data transfer between
computer (NS-Designer)
and PT.
• Alarm histories
• Data logs
• Data blocks
• Operation log
• Captured data
• System
• Projects
This section describes transferring data to the PT. Refer to 10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card to transfer data to a Memory Card.
10-1
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting
The preparations and procedures for downloading data created on the NS-Designer to the PT, and
uploading data from the PT to the NS-Designer are described below. To transfer the data between the
PT and NS-Designer (personal computer), select the method of transfer and make settings to transfer
the data beforehand.
■ Transfer Methods
Six communications methods can be used to transfer data between the PT and NS-Designer, as
shown in the following table. Select the appropriate method depending on the distance between the PT
and NS-Designer, or the features of each transfer method.
Communications
method
Serial cable
Ethernet
Modem
PT model
Required devices
All models
Exclusive cable
NS12-TS01-V1
NS10-TV01-V1
NS8-TV01-V1
NS8-TV11-V1
NS5-SQ01-V1
NS5-SQ01-V2
NS5-TQ01-V2
NS5-MQ01-V2
All models
Twisted-pair
cable
Controller
Link
NS12-TS00-V1
NS12-TS01-V1
NS10-TV00-V1
NS10-TV01-V1
USB
All models (See
note.)
Memory Card
All models
Special cable
for analog
modem
Controller Link
Support
Board, Controller Link
Interface Unit,
twisted-pair
cable
USB cable
Memory Card
interface on
the personal
computer
Features
Transfers screen data by connecting cable between
the PT and personal computer. The length of the cable is 2 m, so the distance between personal computer and PT is limited.
Ethernet is faster than using serial cable and can
cover greater distances. In addition, screen data can
be transferred via a network.
Remote data transfers are possible via phone lines
using a modem.
Data transfers can be performed to PT connected to a
Controller Link network via a Controller Link Support
Board mounted in a computer.
Connecting the personal computer and PT with a USB
cable enables faster screen transfer than serial connections.
First, store the data from the NS-Designer in a Memory Card. Then, transfer the data from the Memory
Card to the PT. Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in
the NS Series Setup Manual for details on transferring
data using a Memory Card.
Note: Support varies for the NS-V1 Series PTs and the PT system program version. Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting
via USB in the Setup Manual.
10-2
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
■ Preparations Required for Data Transfer
Connecting via Serial Cable
To transfer data, connect the personal computer and PT with a cable. Connect the RS-232C port on
the computer to the tool connector on the PT using a cable. Refer to 2-2 Part Names and Functions in
the NS Series Setup Manual for the location of PT connectors. Refer to Appendix 6 Preparing Cables
for Computer Connection in the NS Series Setup Manual for details on preparing the cable.
Transfer method
Serial Cable Connection
Recommended cable
Model: XW2Z-S002 (2 m long) manufactured by OMRON
(D-Sub 9-pin Male ↔ D-Sub 9-pin Female)
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Log in as the administrator when transferring data via a serial connection using NS-Designer Ver.
5.X or earlier installed on Windows NT, 2000, or XP.
Connecting via Ethernet
To transfer data, connect the personal computer and PT with a cable. Connect an Ethernet port on the
computer to the Ethernet connector on the PT using a cable. Refer to 2-2 Part Names and Functions
in the NS Series Setup Manual for the location of PT connectors. Refer to Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection in the NS Series Setup Manual for details on preparing the cable.
Transfer method
Ethernet Connection
Recommended cable
Twisted-pair straight or crossed cable (10/100Base-T)
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Log in as the administrator when transferring data via an Ethernet connection using NS-Designer
Ver. 5.X or earlier installed on Windows NT, 2000, or XP.
PT Settings before Transferring Data via Ethernet
The first time data is transferred to the PT via Ethernet, it is necessary to set the network address,
node address, and IP address beforehand. Make the following settings on the System Menu –
Comm. Tab Page.
Item
Network Address
Node Address
IP Address
Setting
Set the Ethernet network address.
Ensure that the PC and PT settings are not the same.
Set the same network ID (the underlined parts in the example below) and set the
node address as the host ID (the last part of the IP address).
Setting Example
Network address: 1
Ethernet
Twisted-pair cross cable
PT
NS-Designer
Node address: 1
IP address:
192.168.1.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Node address: 2
IP address:
192.168.1.2
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
10-3
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Refer to 6-6-4 Setting Ethernet in the NS Series Setup Manual for details on making settings, such
as the IP Address, at the PT.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ With NS-Designer Ver. 2.X and earlier versions, data must be transferred via serial cable or Memory Card before transferring data via Ethernet. This is not necessary with Ver. 3.X or later versions.
10-4
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Preparations for Transferring Data via Modems
To transfer data, connect the PT and the computer running NS-Designer via cables and modems. Refer to the operation manual for the modem for modem settings.
Settings before Transferring Data via Modems
Make the following settings when connecting the computer to a modem and transferring data over
telephone lines to a PT connected via a modem.
PT Settings
The baud rate must be set before transferring screen data to a PT connected via modems. Set the serial port to be used to a modem connection on the System Menu – Comm. Tab Page, click the Details
Button and set the following items.
Item
Setting
Set the baud rate between the modem and PT to 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
or 115200.
The number of data bits (length) is always 8 bits.
The number of stop bits (length) is always 1 bit.
The parity bit setting is always None.
Baud rate
Data bits
Stop bits
Parity
System Configuration Example
Serial
Modem
Phone line
Serial
Modem
PT
NS-Designer
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When using a project created with system version 5.X or lower, select Settings - Conversion Project -to Ver. 6.0 from the NS-Designer and convert to system project version 6 before making
the settings.
10-5
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Connecting the PT to a Modem
After completing the modem settings, connect the PT to the modem. Use the following connection diagram as reference and connect the PT to the modem.
D-sub 25-pin connector (male)
D-sub 9-pin connector (male)
PT
Modem
Connector hood (FG)
Connector hood (FG)
Shield
FG
1
1
FG
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
SG
7
9
SG
DR
6
7
DR
ER
20
8
ER
Preparations for Transferring Data via Controller Link
The following hardware is required to transfer data via Controller Link.
PT
Computer
Name
Computer Link Interface Unit
(See note 1.)
Controller Link Support Board for
ISA Bus (See note 2.)
Controller Link Support Board
(See note 3.)
Twisted-pair Cable
Note
Model
NS-CLK21
3G8F5-CLK21
3G8F7-CLK21
ESVC0.5X2C
1. Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit in the NS Series Setup Manual (Cat. No. V083)
for information on mounting and wiring the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit.
2. Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual (Cat. No. W307) for information on
mounting and setting the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for ISA Bus.
3. Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards for PCI Bus Operation Manual (Cat. No. W383) for information on mounting and setting the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus.
Settings before Transferring Data via Controller Link
PT Settings
The following settings must be made from the NS-Designer before transferring screen data to a PT
connected via Controller Link. After the settings have been made, they are transferred to the PT along
with any screen data without using the Controller Link.
1.
Select Settings – System Settings – Comm – All from the NS-Designer.
2.
Set Controller Link to Use.
3.
Click the Controller Link Tab and make the following settings. Set the network address of the
Controller Link to which the PT is connected. The setting range is from 1 to 127.
4.
Set the node address to the node address of the PT in the Controller Link network. The setting
range is from 1 to 32.
5.
Set the baud rate to 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.
6.
Click the OK Button.
10-6
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7.
Transfer the settings along with any screen data from the personal computer to the PT without
going through the Controller Link network.
Preparations for Transferring Data via USB
Data can be transferred by connecting the PT and the computer running the NS-Designer with a USB
cable. The USB port on the computer is connected to the USB slave connector on the PT. Refer to 2-2
Part Names and Functions in the NS Series Setup Manual for the location of the connector on the PT.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ To transfer via USB, the USB driver for data transfer to the PT must be installed in the computer. Refer
to 2-2 Installing the NS-Designer for the installation procedure.
♦ For an NS-V1 Series PT, confirm that the lot number of the PT supports USB transfer and that the
system software version installed in the PT supports USB transfer. Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB
in the Setup Manual for details.
Preparations for Transferring Data Using a Memory Card
Data can be saved on a Memory Card from the NS-Designer on the computer and then transferred to
the PT from the Memory Card. The Memory Card is inserted into the memory card connector on the
PT. Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in the NS Series Setup Manual for details on transferring data
using a Memory Card. Refer to Appendix 9 List of Optional Products in the NS Series Setup Manual
for information on the Memory Cards and Memory Card Adapters that can be used.
■ Data Transfer Types
The following data can be transferred.
Data
Project data
Screen data
System program
Projects
Contents
All project data, consisting of screen data and setting file.
Screen data only. Does not contain setting file.
A system program is necessary to operate the PT using
communications or to change font sizes. It is only used for
special occasions, such as replacing the current system
program or recovering system operation.
Send
OK
OK
OK
Receive
OK
NO
OK
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the version of system program in the PT older than the version of the screen data, project data,
screen data, and setting files cannot be transferred. Refer to Appendix 9 Converting Data between
Different Versions of NS-series Products.
♦ Perform PT system recovery if the system in the PT becomes corrupted or needs to be updated.
Refer to 3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards − Errors in the NS Series Setup Manual for
system recovery and update procedures.
10-7
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
■ Data Transfer Flow
To transfer data to PT, follow the steps given below.
Start transfer program.
Refer to the following sections
• Project data: 10-1-3 Transferring Project Data
• Screen data: 10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data
OLE_LINK2
Set communications.
Refer to 10-1-2 Communications Settings for
NS-Designer
Select the project.
Entire
project
System program: Refer to 10-1-5 Transferring
the System Program.
Set communications.
Refer to 10-1-2 Communications Settings for
NS-Designer
Select the system program.
Screen
data
Execute transfer.
Restart PT.
10-8
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
■ Procedure for Transferring Data
Use the following procedure to transfer data to the PT. In this section, only an outline of the procedure
is provided. The actual step may differ depending on the type of data being transferred. For details,
refer to 10-1-3 Transferring Project Data, 10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data, and 10-1-5 Transferring the
System Program.
1.
Click File and select Transfer Data, or click the Windows Start Button and select Programs OMRON - NS-Designer - Screen Data Transfer.
The Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
1
4
5
2
3
No.
1.
2.
Item
Select All
Select Update
Screen
3.
List Boxes for NSDesigner and NSSeries/ Memory
Card
4
5
Connect
Cancel
Contents
Specifies all screen data and the setting file stored in a project.
Clicking this button will automatically select the screen data with different modification
dates between the computer and PT or Memory Card. It is convenient to repeatedly
edit and transfer screen data. If this button is not pressed, the updated screen will not
be selected.
The screen numbers, screen names, and modification dates are displayed. The icons
displayed on the left have the following meanings.
Icon
Meaning
Indicates new screen data.
Indicates modified screen data.
Indicates old screen data.
None
Indicates data that is the same between the computer and PT.
Click this button to connect the computer and PT.
Click this button to disconnect the computer and PT.
10-9
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Select Select Project from the Mode Menu on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Click the Select Project Button, and then select a project. (This step is necessary only to send a
specific project. The default selection is the project data that is currently being created. Usually it is
not necessary to select a project.)
3. Select the communications method. For details, refer to 10-1-2 Communications Settings for NSDesigner.
4. Click the Connect Button. The computer and PT will be connected.
Computer
PT
5. The screen data stored in selected project is displayed in both list boxes.
Select the items (whole project/screen/setting file) that you want to transfer to the PT.
Computer
6. Click the
Click the
PT
Button to transfer data from the computer to the PT or a Memory Card.
Button to transfer data from the PT or Memory Card to the computer.
10-10
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
When uploading, a dialog box will be displayed to specify where the project should be saved. For
details, refer to 10-1-3 Transferring Project Data.
7. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the Start Button to start the transfer.
8. If any of the following items differ between the source and destination, a warning message will be
displayed.
• PT Model
• System Version
• Language
Messages will show information about the source and destination.
Click the Yes Button to continue with the transfer.
9.
When transferring data to a Memory Card is finished, a message that the upload/download has
been completed will be displayed. Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in the NS Series Setup Manual for the procedure to transfer data from a Memory Card to the PT.
If data transfer is performed via a serial cable, modems, Ethernet, or Controller Link, the following
screen will be displayed on the PT while transferring the data.
Screen Display on PT
Progress displayed.
Transfer File Name
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The maximum file size for transferring is 1.44 Mbytes.
If you attempt to transfer data exceeded 1.44 Mbytes, the following message
will be displayed and data transfer will be aborted.
Check the size of files such as BMP files, and after changing or deleting data,
execute the transfer again.
10-11
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10. When the data transfer has been completed, a screen indicating so will be displayed on the PT
and a confirmation dialog box for restarting the PT will be displayed on the computer. If Auto-reset
after the transmission is selected in the Comms Method Dialog Box, the PT will be automatically
reset without displaying the confirmation dialog box.
Screen Display on PT
11. Click the Yes Button to restart the PT.
If you click the No Button, the screen will return to Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and data can
be transferred again.
Even if you click the No Button, a confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will be displayed again
when you exit the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the Yes Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the No Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. If the Cancel Button is clicked, the window will return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
10-12
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Screen Display on PT
The transferred screen is displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data
normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
10-13
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1-2 Communications Settings for NS-Designer
Use the following procedure to set the communication methods between the NS-Designer and PT.
Procedure
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Click the Comms. Method Button.
The Comms. Method Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
3
4
No.
1
2
Setting
Comms.
Method
Set
3
Drive
4
Bank
5
Auto-reset
after the
transmission
Details
Select the method of communications with the PT: Ethernet, Serial, Memory Card,
Serial (Modem), USB, or CLK (Controller Link).
Make settings for the communications method selected in 1, above. Refer to the
setting procedure given for each method later in this section.
When a Memory Card is selected as the communications method, specify the drive
where the Memory Card is inserted.
When a Memory Card is selected as the communications method, select the bank
to be used. A bank refers to a collection of system files and screen data. Banks 1
to 4 can be stored in a Memory Card.
Set whether the PT is to be automatically reset when a transfer is completed for
Ethernet, Serial, Modem, Controller Link, or USB communications.
3.
Click the OK Button. The dialog box will be closed and the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will
return.
4.
Click the Connect Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After the connection is established, the PT will automatically switch to the following window and go into transfer-wait state.
10-14
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Check the following items if the connection is not established.
• Are the cables connected properly?
• Is the PT turned ON? Is the startup message that is displayed directly after turning ON the power displayed?
N
Noottee
♦ When transferring data using Ethernet or Controller Link, data can be sent to other nodes on the network
unintentionally, so always select the node carefully.
■ Detailed Communications Settings
Serial Communications
1
2
No.
1
2
Setting
Port
Response Monitoring Time
Details
Select the COM port on the computer to use to communicate with the PT.
Set the response monitoring time. Increase the time only when there are
frequent communications errors.
10-15
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Ethernet Communications
1.
Make the following settings on the Network Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
2.
Field
FINS Source
Address
FINS Destination
Address
Frame Length
Response Timeout
Setting
Network
Network
Node
-
Details
Set the network address of the Ethernet network to which the
computer is connected.
Set the network address of the Ethernet network to which the PT
is connected.
Set the node address of the PT.
Set the maximum frame length. Use the default setting.
Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when
there are frequent communications errors.
Make the following settings on the Driver Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
Field
Workstation
Node Number
2
3
4
Item
-
Auto-detect
IP Address
Port Number
-
Details
The workstation node number can be input if the Auto-detect
option is not selected. If automatic detection is not used, the
node and IP address must be input on the conversion table on
the Ethernet Tab Page in the System Settings.
Select this option to automatically generate the node address of
the computer from the IP address. If automatic detection is used,
the node and IP address do not need to be input on the conversion table on the Ethernet Tab Page in the System Settings.
Example: If the IP address of the computer is 192.168.0.10, the
node address of the computer will be automatically set to 10.
Set the IP address of the PT to be connected.
Set the UDP port number. Normally 9600 can be used.
10-16
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Controller Link Communications
1.
Make the following settings on the Network Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
No.
1
2
3
4
2.
Field
FINS Destination Address
Frame length
Response
Timeout
Item
Network
Node
-
Details
Set the network address of the Controller Link network to which
the PT is connected.
Set the node address of the PT.
Set the maximum frame length. Use the default setting.
Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when
there are frequent communications errors.
Make the following settings on the Driver Tab Page.
4
1
2
3
5
6
No.
3
4
Board Type
Item
Shared RAM
Address
Interrupt
Level
Baud Rate
-
5
6
Network Address
Node
Unit
1
Field
NSB
2
Details
Set to the same value as the DIP switch on the Controller Link
Support Board.
Set to the same value as the jumper pins on the Controller Link
Support Board.
Set the baud rate to 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.
Set the Controller Link Support Board type to ISA for an ISA
Board or to PCI for a PCI Board.
Set the local node address of the Controller Link Support Board.
Set the unit number of the Controller Link Support Board between 16 and 31.
10-17
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Modem Communications
1.
Make the following settings on the Network Tab Page.
1
No.
1
2.
Field
Response
timeout
Item
-
Details
Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when
there are frequent communications errors.
Make the following settings on the Modem Tab Page.
The settings on the Driver Tab Page do not need to be made if the following settings are made on
the Modem Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
5
No.
1
2
3
Field
Modem
Current Location
Connect To
Item
Country Code
4
Area Code
5
Telephone
Number
Details
Select the modem driver. Click the Configure Button to display
the Modem Property Dialog Box.
Set the location of the local modem.
Set the country code of the destination modem, even when
communicating within the same country.
Set the area code of the destination modem, even when communicating within the same area.
Set the phone number of the modem to which to connect.
10-18
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Click the Configure Button on the Modem Tab Page and set the modem properties.
Setting Example
Set the following items on the General Tab Page.
1
2
No.
1
2
Field on General Tab Page
Data connection options
Item
Port speed
Flow control
Details
Set the baud rate of the modem.
This item enables or disables flow control. Disable flow control.
Make the following settings on the Advanced Tab Page.
1
2
3
No.
1
2
3
Field on Details Tab Page
Hardware settings
Item
Data bits
Parity
Stop bits
Details
Set the data length to 8 bits.
Set the parity to “none.”
Set 1 stop bit.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the option to Auto-reset after the transmission is selected, the PT will be automatically reset and
the phone line will be disconnected after transfer has been completed.
10-19
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
USB Communications
No.
1
Setting
Response
monitoring
time
Details
The monitoring time for receiving a response.
Increase this time only if there are excessive communications errors.
10-1-3 Transferring Project Data
Use the following procedure to transfer all data for a selected project to the PT or a Memory Card.
Procedure: Downloading Project Data
1.
Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2.
Select Select Project from the Mode Menu or right-click on the Transfer Data Dialog Box and select Select Project from the pull-down menu.
3.
Click the Select Project Button and select the project. (The default selection is the project data
currently being edited by the NS-Designer. Normally, selecting the project is not required.)
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When transferring screen data that is being edited, save the screen data before
transferring. If the data is not saved before transferring, the most recently
saved data will be transferred and unsaved editing will be lost from the transfer
data.
4.
Click the Comms. Method Button and set the communications method. Refer to 10-1-2 Communications Settings for NS-Designer for details.
5.
Click the Connect Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
6.
Click Select All at the top of the NS-Designer Box. All the screens stored in the project will be
selected.
10-20
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7.
Click the Button to display the confirmation dialog box and then click the Start Button to start
downloading the data. When using a Memory Card to transfer data, this will complete the transfer
process. Steps 8 and 9 are not required.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
8.
When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed
at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to run the project
that has been transferred. Click the Yes Button to restart the PT.
If the wrong project data has been transferred, the procedure can be executed again from step 2
without restarting the PT by clicking the No Button.
Even if the No Button is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will appear
after Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box is closed. If the Yes Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the No Button is clicked, you will have to restart the PT manually. If the Cancel Button is
clicked, the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When data is transferred, any of the following history data that was previously
recorded in the PT will be deleted.
- Alarm History
- Data Log
- Operation Log
- Error Log
- Internal holding areas ($HB and $HW), only portions used by the Smart Active Parts.
♦ Sheet numbers are displayed as follows on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog
Box:
Sheet 0
4095
Sheet 5
4090
Sheet 1
4094
Sheet 6
4089
Sheet 2
4093
Sheet 7
4088
Sheet 3
Sheet 4
4092
4091
Sheet 8
Sheet 9
4087
4086
Procedure: Uploading a Project
Use the following procedure to transfer data stored in the PT or on a Memory Card to the NSDesigner.
1.
Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2.
Select Select Project from the Mode Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box
10-21
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
and select Select Project from the pop-up menu.
3.
Click the Comms. Method Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to 10-1-2
Communications Settings for NS-Designer.
4.
Click the Connect Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
5.
Click the
Button. The Save as Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the project name under
which to save the uploading data, and click the Save Button.
6.
A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the OK Button. Uploading will start.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
7.
When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed
at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to operate the
screens that have been transferred. Click the Yes Button to restart the PT. Click the No Button to
continue downloading data.
Even if the No Button is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will appear
after Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box is closed. If the Yes Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the No Button is clicked, you will have to restart the PT manually. If the Cancel Button is
clicked, the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return.
10-22
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
When uploading data, only the whole project can be transferred. Transferring
separate screens is not possible.
The contents of system setting on the NS-Designer cannot be uploaded.
10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data
Individual screen data stored in the selected project can be transferred to PT or Memory Card.
Procedure
1.
Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box
2.
Select Select Project from the Mode Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box
and select Select Project from the pop-up menu.
3.
Click the Select Project Button and select the project. (The default selection is the project currently being edited by the NS-Designer. Normally, selecting the project is not required.)
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
When transferring screen data that is being edited, save the screen data before
transferring. If the data is not saved before transferring, the most recently
saved data will be transferred and any unsaved changes will be lost in the
transfer data.
4.
Click the Comms. Method Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to 10-1-2
Communications Settings for NS-Designer.
5.
Click the Connect Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
6.
Select the screen data to transfer from the list box for the NS-Designer. Click the Select Update
Screen Button to automatically select only screen data with different modification dates between
the computer and PT or Memory Card.
10-23
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Display screens
with different dates.
7.
Click the
Button. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
8.
Click the Start Button. The download will be started.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When you select File - Save All on the NS-Designer, the modification dates for
all screens will be changed. Therefore, if the Select Updated Screen Button is
clicked, all screens will be selected, not just updated screens.
♦ When choosing multiple screens at the same time, select screens while pressing the Ctrl Key. To select a range of screens, select the screens while pressing The Shift Key. To cancel selection, click the screens again while pressing
the Ctrl Key.
♦ When transferring the data, the following data will be deleted.
- Alarm History
- Data Log
- Operation Log
- Error Log
- Internal holding areas ($HB and $HW), only portions used by the Smart Active Parts.
♦ If the project name read by the data transfer program and the project name
stored in the PT are the same, only screen data will be transferred even if the
contents of the two projects are different. Always confirm data contents when
transferring only screen data.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
9.
When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed
at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to run the project
that has been transferred. Click the Yes Button to restart the PT.
Click the No Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be
performed again.
10-24
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Even if the No Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when
exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the Yes Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If
the No Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the
Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the Cancel Button.
N
Noottee
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data
normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
Sheet numbers are displayed as follows on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog
Box:
Sheet 0
4095
Sheet 5
4090
Sheet 1
4094
Sheet 6
4089
Sheet 2
4093
Sheet 7
4088
Sheet 3
4092
Sheet 8
4087
Sheet 4
4091
Sheet 9
4086
10-1-5 Transferring the System Program
A system program is necessary to operate PT for communications or to change font sizes. It is only
used for special occasion, such as replacing the system program or recovering system operation.
Procedure: Downloading the System Program
1.
Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2.
Select Select System from the Mode Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box
and select Select System from the pop-up menu.
3.
Click the Select System Button and select the folder named bank1. The folder named bank1 is in
the System Backup – NS12_V1/NS10_V1/NS8_V1/NS5_V1_V2 – V6_2 folder under the NSDesigner installation folder. Refer to 2-2 Installing the NS-Designer for details on directories.
4.
Click the Comms. Method Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to 10-1-2
Communications Settings for NS-Designer.
5.
Click the Connect Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
10-25
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
6.
Click the
Button. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
7.
Click the Start Button. The download will be started.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
8.
The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the Yes Button to restart
the PT.
Click the No Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be
performed again.
Even if the No Button is clicked, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when
exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the Yes Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If
the No Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the
Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the Cancel Button.
10-26
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
N
Noottee
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
If the system program is transferred to the PT, the screen data in the PT will not be deleted. When
transferring the system program, match the version of system program and project data before operating the PT.
If the PT system is destroyed or requires updating, perform the PT system recovery operation. Refer
to 3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards in the NS Series Setup Manual for the procedures to
recovery and updating.
Procedure: Uploading the System Program
Use the following procedure to transfer the data stored in the PT or Memory Card to the NS-Designer.
1.
Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2.
Select Select System from the Mode Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box
and select Select System from the pop-up menu.
3.
Click the Comms. Method Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to 10-1-2
Communications Settings for NS-Designer.
4.
Click the Connect Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
5.
Click the
6.
Specify the project name under which to save the data, and click the Save Button.
7.
A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the OK Button. The upload will be started.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
8.
The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the Yes Button to restart
the PT. Click the No Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading
can be performed again.
Button. The Save as Dialog Box will be displayed.
10-27
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Even if the No Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when
exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the Yes Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If
the No Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the
Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the CANCEL Button.
N
Noottee
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
10-28
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
This section explains preparations and procedures to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted
into PT and the NS-Designer (personal computer).
10-2-1 Preparations for Transferring to a Memory Card in PT
To transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in the PT and the NS-Designer, select the transfer
method, and make the settings beforehand.
Transfer Methods
There are five methods to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in PT and the NS-Designer:
• Serial cable
• Ethernet
• Modems
• Controller Link
• USB
Connect the PT and NS-Designer (personal computer) using either of these methods and transfer the
data. Refer to 10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting for the features of these methods and the required cables.
Before Connecting
To transfer data between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer (personal computer) using serial,
modem, Ethernet, Controller Link, or USB communications, settings on the PT are required. Refer to
10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting and make settings for FinsGateway.
Transfer Methods
The following operations can be performed between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer.
Memory Card → NS-Designer
NS-Designer → Memory Card
Transferring files stored in a Memory Card.
Transferring files stored in the computer.
Deleting files stored in a Memory Card
Creating folders in a Memory Card
Deleting folders in a Memory Card
10-29
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Data Transfer Flow
Use the following steps to transfer the data between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer.
Start Memory Card transfer.
Set communications.
Transfer data.
NS-Designer →Memory Card in the PT
Memory Card in the PT→ NS-Designer (Computer)
10-30
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-2-2 Procedure for Transferring Data to a Memory Card in the PT
Use the following procedure to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in the PT and the NSDesigner (personal computer).
1.
Click the Windows Start Button and select Programs - OMRON – CX-One - NS-Designer Memory Card Transfer.
2.
The Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Number
1
Item
Contents
Connect Button
Connects the computer to the PT.
2
Cancel Button
Disconnects the computer from the PT.
3
Comms.Method Button Displays the Comms Method Dialog Box.
4
Displays the next-higher folder.
Deletes the files selected in the File List.
If the selected folder is empty, the folder will be deleted. If the selected folder is
not empty, an error message will appear and the folder will not be deleted.
Creates a new folder.
5
Look in:
Displays where the file is placed.
“/” indicates the root folder in the Memory Card.
6
File List
Displays the files and folders that are in the folder as a list.
Selecting, transferring, and deleting the files or folders can be performed.
7
Downloads the selected files or folders from the file list of NS-Designer to the
Memory Card inserted in PT.
Uploads the selected files or folders from the file list of the Memory Card to the
computer.
10-31
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
The following action on the PT may be delayed while transferring the data using the Memory card.
- Key press actions
- Updating number values and character strings
- Time for displaying a screen
3.
Click the Comm. Method Button to select communications method.
(1)
Number
1
Item
Comms. Method
Contents
Selects the communications method to Ethernet, Serial,
Modem, Controller Link, or USB.
4.
Set the communications method and then click the OK Button.
5.
Click the Connect Button on the Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box.
When the connection has been made, the file list will be displayed for the Memory Card.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ If the connection is not completed, an error message will be displayed. Click
the Connect Button again after checking the following items.
- Communications Method
- Node Address
- Cable Connection
6.
Select the files or folders from the file list in the Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box to execute the
transfer, deletion, and creation of new folders.
10-32
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
10-3-1 Overview of SPMA
Data from other devices can be accessed from an application on a computer by going through the
networks. This is referred to as SPMA (Single Port Multi Access). When transferring screen data from
the NS-Designer, users can send it to the PT through a PLC connected with the PT by a Serial,
Ethernet, or Controller Link network.
When transferring/monitoring data, such as a ladder program, from the CX-Programmer, users can
also send it to the PLC through the PT connected with the PLC by a Serial, Ethernet, or Controller Link
network.
N
Noottee
♦
Be sure to confirm safety at the destination PT before transferring screen data. In particular, before
transferring data using SPMA, be sure to confirm the network address, node address, and unit number.
10-3-2 SPMA Features
Transferring Data from the Computer to the PT through a PLC or a Memory
Card in the PT
Screen data can be uploaded/downloaded from the NS-Designer to/from a PT connected by serial,
Ethernet, or Controller Link communications through the PLC (CS/CJ-series PLCs only) connected
with the PT by a Serial, Ethernet, or Controller Link network. In addition, the data can be downloaded/uploaded to a Memory Card placed in the PT.
NS-Designer
Computer
Ethernet/Controller Link
Serial (Tool bus) or modem
Serial 1:N NT Link
PT
CS/CJ-series PLC
Ethernet/Controller Link
PT
10-33
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Transferring/Monitoring Ladder Programs via a PT
Data, such as a ladder program, can be uploaded/downloaded from the CX-Programmer to a PLC
connected by a Serial or Controller Link network through a PT connected with the PLC by an Ethernet
network.
NS-Designer
NS-Designer
Ethernet
Controller Link
1:N NT Link
1:N NT Link
PT
PT
PLC
Controller Link
PLC
Ethernet
PLC
PLC
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
The CX-Net cannot be used when using the CX-Programmer through the PT.
♦
Updating screen display and responses of touch input actions may slow down when using the CXProgrammer through the PT.
♦
Correct operation is possible only for the configurations described in this manual.
10-3-3 System Configuration
Transferring Screen Data from the NS-Designer to a PT through a PLC
Screen data can be transferred from the NS-Designer to the PT as shown below. Procedures are different depending on the configuration.
Details
Screen Data
Comms.Setting
Computer-PLC
PLC-PT
Serial
COM
Serial
COM
Ethernet or
NS-Designer
Serial (Tool Bus/modem)
CPU Unit
See P10-36.
Modem
Serial, 1:N NT Links
CS/CJ-series
PLCs (Relay)
Ethernet/Controller Link
Serial
Ethernet/Controller Link
See P10-39.
Modem
Controller Link
See P10-44.
Ethernet
Serial
CPU Unit
Serial, 1:N NT Links
Controller Link
Ethernet/Controller Link
See P10-49.
Ethernet
Controller Link
Controller Link
* Cables must be connected to the built-in RS-232C port or peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit
by a serial 1:N NT Link. To make settings for the expansion routing tables (routing tables that treat
serial communications as Network communications), CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later is required.
To transfer screen data to a PT through a PLC, one of the following CPU Units (Lot No. 030201 and
later) is required. CPU Units and lot numbers not listed in the following table do not support this function.
10-34
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
PLC series
CJ Series
CS Series
CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66 H
CJ1G-CPU42 H
CJ1G-CPU43 H
CJ1G-CPU44 H
CJ1G-CPU45 H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64 H
CS1H-CPU65 H
CS1H-CPU66 H
CS1H-CPU67 H
CS1G-CPU42 H
CS1G-CPU43 H
CS1G-CPU44 H
CS1G-CPU45 H
CS1D-CPU42S
CS1D-CPU44S
CS1D-CPU65S
CS1D-CPU67S
Lot number
030201 and later
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
To send screen data to a PT through a PLC that is connected with a PT by a Serial network, the PT
must be connected to the built-in RS-232C port or peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit. The screen
data cannot be transferred to a PT connected with the RS-232C port on a Serial Communications
Board or a RS-422A/485 port of the PLC.
♦
When connecting the PLC and PT by a Serial network (1:N NT Links), set NT Link Max on the Settings
– Host Link Port Tab Page in the CX-Programmer to a value greater than 1.
♦
Before transferring screen data from the NS-Designer to a PT that is connected by a Serial network
(1:N NT Links) through the PLC, confirm that High Speed is ON under Option – Pass Through PLC
Settings of the Screen Data Transfer tool.
10-35
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Transferring/Monitoring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from the CXProgrammer to a PLC through a PT
The following configuration allows transferring and monitoring a PLC from the CX-Programmer.
CX-Programmer/
Ladder program, etc.
NS-Designer
Serial 1:N NT Links
Ethernet*
PT (Relay)
Controller Link
CX-Programmer/
NS-Designer
Serial 1:N NT Links
Controller Link*
PT (Relay)
Ethernet
* Cannot transfer/monitor data, such as a ladder program, passing through the PT when the computer
(CX-Programmer) is connected to the PT using serial communications, a modem, or a USB cable.
Ladder program, etc.
CX-Programmer/
NS-Designer
Cannot pass through
Serial
(Toolbus/Modem), USB
Serial 1:N NT Links
the PT
PT (Relay)
Controller Link
10-3-4 Procedural Example
To explain details of settings simply, procedures are described as tutorial with examples depending on
the configuration. The values such as IP Addresses, Network Addresses described below are the examples so please set those in accordance with the actual environment.
■ Serial Connection between Computer and PLC and Serial 1:N NT Link
between PLC and PT Set for Transferring Screen Data to a PT through
a PLC.
This section describes data transfer from the NS-Designer to a PT connected either an RS-232C port
or a peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit by a Serial (1:N NT Link) connection through a PLC connected with the computer by serial (Peripheral bus) connection. In this example, the cable between the
computer and the PLC is connected to the peripheral port on the PLC and the cable between the PLC
and the PT is connected to the RS-232C port on the PLC.
10-36
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
PT
Screen Data
NS-Designer
Serial (1:N NT Links)
Serial (Tool bus)
Communications Method
between PT and PLC:
Serial
Communications Method
between computer and PLC:
Serial COM
Settings on the PLC
It is not necessary to make settings when connecting using the above system configuration.
Settings on the PT
It is not necessary to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by serial 1:N NT Link communications. For information on connection methods for 1:N NT Links, refer to Section 4 Connecting the
Host to Serial Port in the NS series Setup Manual.
Setting the Communications Method
1.
Open the desired project on NS-Designer and select File - Screen Data Transfer. The Screen data
Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
2.
Click the Comms. Method Button on the top right of the dialog box. The Comms.Setting Dialog
Box will appear.
3.
Select Pass Through PLC option.
4.
Select the communications method between computer and PLC. Here, Serial (Toolbus) is set as
an example.
5.
Select the communications method between PLC and PT. Here, NT Link is set as an example.
Select when transferring data via a PLC.
Select communications method between
the computer and PLC. (Serial (Toolbus)
is selected as an example.)
Select the communications method
between the PLC and PT. (Here, NT
Link is selected as an example.)
6.
Click the Set… Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Serial
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
10-37
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
(1) Set the COM port to use to connect
the computer and PLC.
(2) Set the baud rate between the
computer and PLC.
(3) Set whether to detect the baud rate
between the computer and PLC.
(4) Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there
are frequent communications error.
1
2
Port
Baud rate
3
Detect baud rate
4
Response monitor time
Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.
Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC to 9600, 19200, 37400,
57600, or 115200.
Set whether to detect the baud rate set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
The default is to detect the baud rate. If detection is disabled (pin 4 on the
PLC’s DIP switch is turned ON), set the baud rate in 2, above, to the same
speed as set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
Input the response monitor time. Increase the time only when there are
frequent communications error.
7.
Set the Port to the COM port to use to connect the computer to the PLC. Here COM1 is set as
and example.
8.
Click the OK Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.
9.
Click the Set… Button on the right of the NS and PLC Field.
Enter the port to use to connect the PT
and PLC.
Enter the unit number of the destination
PT set for the NT Link (1:N).
10. Set the port to use to connect PLC and the unit number of the PT that will be the destination.
Here, the unit number is set to 0 because the cable is connected to the RS-232C port with a 1:1
connection.
11. Click the OK Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.
12. Click the OK Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.
Transferring Screen Data
1.
Click the Connect Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the screen on the PT switches to the following screen and the PT will wait for the data to be
transferred. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.
10-38
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2.
Check Select All, and click the
3.
Click the Start Button. The download will be started.
4.
The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the YES Button to
restart the PT. Click the NO Button to continue downloading data.
button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box.
Even if the NO Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
If the YES Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the NO Button is clicked, it will become
necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the Cancel
Button.
■ Serial Connection between a Computer and a PLC and Ethernet between a PLC and a PT Set for Transferring Data to the PT through the
PLC
This section describes an example of the settings used when transferring screen data from the NSDesigner to a PT connected by Ethernet through a PLC connected with the computer by a serial (toolbus) connection.
10-39
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Screen Data
Serial (Toolbus)
Ethernet
Ethernet Settings
Ethernet Unit Setting
Node Address
6
Node Address
22
IP Address
192.168.0.6
192.168.0.22
Unit Number
1
IP Address
Ethernet network
address
3
Settings on the PLC
Create the following routing table entry using CX-Net of CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer
the routing tables to the PLC.
1.
Input the unit number of the Ethernet Unit. Here, 1 is input.
2.
Input the network address of the Ethernet Unit. Here, 3 is input.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦
Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on the PLC’s CPU Unit when connecting a device other than a
computer running the CX-Programmer (such as a PT or host computer).
♦
Turn ON pin 5 when connecting a computer running the CX-Programmer.
10-40
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Settings on the PT
Make the settings on the NS-Designer shown below. After completing these settings, transfer them to
the PT along with the screen data.
1.
Select Settings - System Setting – Comm - All on the NS-Designer.
2.
Set Ethernet to Enable.
3.
Click the Ethernet Tab and make the following settings.
Set the same IP address as that of the PT. Here, 192.168.0.22 is set as an example.
4.
Set the subnet mask of the PT. Here, 255.255.255.0 is set as an example.
5.
Click the Add Button to display the IP Address Setting Dialog Box.
Set the same Node Address and IP Address as those set in the Ethernet Unit. Here, 6 is set for
Node Address and 192.168.0.6 is set for the IP Address as examples.
6.
Click the OK Button.
7.
Transfer the settings with the screen data to the PT. To do this, connect the PT with the computer
directly and perform standard data transfer. Do NOT transfer the data through the PLC.
Setting the Communications Method
1.
Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select File - Screen Data Transfer. The
Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
2.
Click the Comms.Method Button on the top right of the dialog box. The Comms.Setting Dialog
Box will appear.
3.
Select Pass Through PLC.
4.
Select the communications method between the computer and PLC. Set Serial (Toolbus).
5.
Select the communications method between PLC and PT. Set Ethernet.
10-41
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Make sure to select when transferring data through a PLC.
Select the communications method between
the computer and PLC, (Here, Serial
(Toolbus) is selected as an example.)
Select the communications method
between the PLC and PT. (Here, Ethernet
is selected as an example.)
6.
Click the Set… Button on the right of the communications method setting. The following Serial
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
(1) Set the COM port to use to connect
the computer and PLC.
(2) Set the baud rate between the
computer and PLC.
(3) Set whether to detect the baud rate
between the computer and PLC.
(4) Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there
are frequent communications error.
1
Port
2
Baud Rate
3
Baud Rate Auto-Detect
4
Response Monitoring
Time
Set the COM port on the computer to use to connect the computer and
PLC.
Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC to 9600, 19200, 34700,
57600, or 115200.
Set whether to detect the baud rate set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
The default is to detect the baud rate. If detection is disabled (pin 4 on the
PLC’s DIP switch is turned ON), set the baud rate in 2, above, to the same
speed as set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
Input the response monitor time. Increase the time only when there are
frequent communications error.
7.
Set the Port to the COM port to use to connect the computer to the PLC. Here COM1 is set as an
example.
8.
Click the OK Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.
9.
Click the Set… Button on the right of the NS and PLC Field. The Ethernet Setting Dialog Box
shown below will be displayed.
10-42
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10. Set the Network Address between the PT and PLC (the value set in the local network table using
CX-Net). Here, 3 is set as the Network Address for Ethernet communications.
11. Set the Node Address of the destination PT for the Node Address. Here, the node address of the
PT is input. Here, 22 is set as an example.
12. Click the OK Button in the Ethernet Setting Dialog Box.
13. Click the OK Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.
Transferring Screen Data
1.
Click the Connect button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the window will switch to the following window. Here, the entire project will be transferred as
an example.
2.
Select Select All, and click the
3.
Click the Start Button. The download will be started.
4.
The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the YES Button to
restart the PT. Click the NO Button to continue downloading data.
button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box.
10-43
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Even if the NO Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when
exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
If the YES Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the NO Button is clicked, it will become
necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel Button.
■ Ethernet between a Computer and a PLC and Serial 1:N NT Link between the PLC and a PT Set for Transferring Screen Data to the PT
through the PLC
This section describes data transfer from the NS-Designer to a PT connected with either the RS-232C
port or peripheral port in the PLC by a Serial connection through a PLC connected by Ethernet.
Screen Data
NS-Designer
PT
Communication Method
between computer and
PLC: Ethernet
NS-Designer
IP Address
on the
computer
Network
Address
Node
Address
192.168.0.10
1
10
Communication Method
between PT and PLC: Serial
Ethernet Unit Setting
IP Address
192.168.0.6
Local
1
Network
Address
Node
6 (rotary
Address
switch)
Unit No.
1 (rotary
switch)
Routing Table Setting
Local Network Table
Unit No.
1 (Unit No. of the Ethernet Unit)
252: RS-232C Port
253: Peripheral Port
Serial Setting
Network Address for Serial
Communications
NT Link unit number of the PT
3
0
Local Network
Address
1
3
Settings on the PLC
Set the IP Address of the PLC Ethernet Unit (hardware or software setting) and Node Address (rotary
switch setting).
For instance, set values as follows:
IP Address: 192.168.0.6
Network Address: 1
Node Address: 6
Refer to the Chapter 9 Ethernet Connection- Setting an Ethernet Unit in the Tutorial Manual for details
on settings.
10-44
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1.
Create the routing tables using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer them to
the PLC. Create the local network table treating either the RS232-C port or peripheral port as the
Communications Unit by setting the items shown below.
Connecting the PT with the PLC Using the RS-232C Port
Treat the RS-232C port as the Communications Unit. Set 252 for the SIOU, and set 3 for the Local
Network of the serial communications that pass through this unit number.
Unit Number
252 (serial port)
Local Network Address
3
Connecting the PT with the PLC by the Peripheral Port
Treat the peripheral port as the Communications Unit. Set 253 for the SIOU, and set 3 for the Local
Network of the serial communications that pass through this unit number.
Unit Number
253 (peripheral port)
2.
Local Network Address
3
Add the Local Network Table for PLC Ethernet Unit in the same manner.
Set 1 for the SIOU and 1 for Local Network.
Unit Number
1
Local Network Address
1
Settings on the PT
There is no need to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by Serial (1:N NT Link) connection.
Setting the Communications Method
1.
Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select File - Screen Data Transfer. The Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
2.
Click the Comms.Setting Button at the top right of the dialog box. The Comms.Setting Dialog
Box will appear.
3.
Select Pass Through PLC.
4.
Select the communications method under Computer. Here, Ethernet is set.
5.
Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. Set NT Link under NS and PLC.
10-45
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Select this option to transfer through the PLC.
Set the communications method between the
computer and PLC.
Select the communications method between the
PLC and PT.
6.
Click the Set… Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Network
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
Set the Ethernet network address.
Set the network address and node
number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit.
Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there are
frequent communications error.
7.
Input the Ethernet network address for the Network of the FINS source address. Here, 1 is set as
an example.
8.
Input network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit for the Network and Node of
the FINS destination address. Here, 1 is set for the Network and 6 is set for the Node as an example.
9.
Click the Driver Tab and make the following settings.
10-46
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Set the IP address of the PLC’s
Ethernet Unit.
10. Input the IP address of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit. Here, 192.168.0.6 is set for the IP Address as an
example.
11. Click the OK Button in the Network Settings Dialog Box.
12. Click the Set… Button on the right of the NS and PLC Field. The Serial Setting Dialog Box shown
below will be displayed.
Set the serial communications network address
(the value set for the local network table in the
CX-Net) between the PT and PLC.
Input the unit number of the PT that is the
target of the 1:N NT Link.
13. Set the serial communications network address (the value set for the local network table in the
CX-Net) between the PT and PLC. Set 3 as the Serial communications network address.
14. Set the unit number of the destination PT. Here, 0 is set because the RS-232C port is connected
1:1.
15. Click the OK Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.
16. Click the OK Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.
10-47
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Transferring Screen Data
1.
Click the Connect Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the screen on the PT switches to the following screen and the PT will wait for the data to be
transferred. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.
2.
Select Select All, and click the
3.
Click the Start Button. The download will be started.
4.
The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the YES Button to
restart the PT. Click the NO Button to continue downloading data.
Button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box.
Even if the NO Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when
exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
If the YES Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the NO Button is clicked, it will become
necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel Button.
10-48
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
■ Ethernet between a Computer and a PLC and Controller Link between
a PLC and a PT Set for Transferring Data to the PT through the PLC
Screen Data
PT
NS-Designer
Communication method between PT
and PLC: Controller Link
Communication method
between computer and
PLC: Ethernet
NS-Designer IP
Address on the
computer
192.168.1.0
Network Address
1
Node Address
0
Ethernet Unit Setting
Controller Link Unit Setting
PT Setting
IP Address
Local Network
Address
Network Address for
Controller Link
Communications
Network Address
Controller Link Unit
Node Address
Node Address
Unit No.
192.168.0.6
1
6 (rotary
switch)
1 (rotary
switch)
3
Node Address
4
Unit Address
2
3
5
Routing Table Setting
Local Network Table
Unit No.
Local Network
Address
1 (Unit No. of the
Ethernet Unit)
2 (Unit No. of the
Controller Link Unit)
1
3
Settings on the PLC
1.
Set the IP Address of the PLC Ethernet Unit (hardware or software setting) and Node Address
(rotary switch setting).
For instance, set values as follows:
IP Address: 192.168.0.6
Network Address: 1
Node Address: 6
Note: Refer to the Chapter 9 Ethernet Connection- Setting an Ethernet Unit in the Tutorial Manual for details on
settings.
2.
Set the Node Address and Network Address of the PLC Controller Link Unit.
For instance, set values as follows:
Node Address: 4
Network Address: 3
Note: Refer to Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details on settings.
3.
Create the following routing table using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer it
to the PLC.
Unit Number
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link Unit
1
2
Local Network Address
1
3
10-49
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Settings on the PT
Make the settings on the NS-Designer shown below. After completing these settings, transfer them to
the PT along with the screen data.
1.
Select Settings – System Setting – Comm-All in NS-Designer.
2.
Set Controller Link to Enable and click the Routing Table Setting Button. The Routing Table
Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
3.
Input 1 as the Destination Network Address, 3 as the Remote Network Address, and 4 as the
Gateway Node Address (Controller Link Unit’s node address). Click the OK Button to return to the
System Setting Dialog Box.
4.
Transfer the above settings along with any desired screen data to the PT. At this time, connect the
PT directly to the computer. Perform normal screen transfer without selecting Pass Through PLC.
Setting the Communications Method
1.
Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select File - Screen Data Transfer. The Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
10-50
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2.
Click the Comms.Method Button at the top right of the dialog box. The Comms.Method Dialog
Box will appear.
3.
Select Pass Through PLC.
4.
Select the communications method under Computer. Here, Ethernet is set.
5.
Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. Here, CLK (Controller Link) is set.
Select this option to transfer through the PLC.
Select the communications method
between the computer and PLC.
Select the communications method
between the PLC and PT.
6.
Click the Set… Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Network
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
Set the Ethernet network
address
Set the network address and
node number of the PLC’s
Ethernet Unit.
Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there
are frequent communications
error.
7.
Input the Ethernet network address for the Network of the FINS source address. Here, 1 is set as
an example.
8.
Input network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit for the Network and Node of
the FINS destination address. Here the network address is set to 1 and the node number is set to
6 as examples.
9.
Click the Driver Tab and make the following settings.
10-51
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Set the IP address of the
PLC’s Ethernet Uniti.
10. Input the IP address of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit. Here, 192.168.0.6 is input as an example.
11. Click the OK Button in the Network Setting Dialog Box.
12. Set the Network Address between the PT and PLC (the value set in the local network table using
CX-Net). In this example, 3 was set as the Network Address for Controller Link communications
and so set 3.
13. Set the Node Address of the destination PT. In this example, set the Node Address of the PT’s
Controller Link Unit, i.e., set 5.
Set the Controller Link communications network
address (the value set for the local network table
in the CX-Net) between the PT and PLC.
Set the unit number of the PT that will be the
destination.
14. Click the OK Button.
10-52
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
■ Transferring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from CX-Programmer to
a PLC through a PT
Transferring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from a Computer to a PLC through a PT Connected to
the Computer via Ethernet and Connected to the PLC via Serial 1:N NT Link
Ladder program, etc.
Ethernet
Serial 1:N NT Links
Node Address: 22
IP Address:
IP Address:
192.168.0.10
192.168.0.22
Network Address: 1
Settings on the PT
Go to the System Menu - Comm Tab Page. Press the Enable Button under Ethernet to display settings
on the right side of the screen. Set these items in the way shown in the following table.
It is also possible to make the following settings in the NS-Designer’s system settings, and transfer
them together with any desired screen data beforehand.
Item
Network address
Node address
IP address
Subnet mask
IP address (of computer)
Setting
1 (network address between the computer and PT)
22 (PT’s node address)
192.168.0.22 (PT’s IP address)
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.10
Settings on the PLC
It is not necessary to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by serial communications (1:N
NT Link).
Settings on the Computer
1. Start up CX-Programmer. Then, set the IP address of the PT in the IP Address on the Network Settings - Driver Tab Page.
2. Click the Network Tab and set the items in the table below.
Item
FINS Source Address
FINS Destination Address
Node
Frame Length
Response Timeout
Setting
Set the local network address of the PT.
Connection via serial port A: 111
Connection via serial port B: 112
Here, 10 is set as an example.
Here, 1000 is set as an example.
Default value is 2.
10-53
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The node set from the Network Tab Page is fixed at 1. Transfer will not be performed correctly if
another number is set. Be sure to set 1.
3.
After completing the settings, establish online connection and transfer the data (e.g., ladder program).
The following example shows how to perform settings for transferring data, such as a ladder program,
from CX-Programmer, via a PT connected via Ethernet, to a PLC connected via Controller Link.
Ladder program, etc.
Ethernet
Controller Link
IP Address:
Controller Link Unit’s
IP Address:
192.168.0.22
Node Address: 4
192.168.0.10
Node Address: 22
Controller Link Unit’s
Controller Link Unit’s
Unit Number: 2
Node Address: 5
Network Address: 3
Network Address: 1
Settings on the PT
Perform the following settings with NS-Designer.
1.
Select Settings - System Setting – Comm - All on the NS-Designer.
2.
Set Controller Link and Ethernet to Enable, click the Controller Link Tab, and make the following settings.
Set the network address for Controller
Link communications between the PT
and PLC.
Set the unit number for the PT’s
Controller Link Unit.
10-54
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3.
Click the Ethernet Tab and make the following settings.
4.
Set the network address between the computer and NS-Designer as the network address. In this
example, 1 is set.
5.
Set the PT’s node address as the node address. In this example, 22 is set.
6.
Set the IP address set for the PT as the IP address. In this example, 192.168.0.22 is set.
7.
Next set the subnet mask. In this example, 255.255.255.0 is set.
8.
Next, click the Add Button at the bottom left of the dialog box to display the IP Address Setting
Dialog Box. In this example, the node address and IP address set for the PT and computer are
set.
9.
Click the OK Button.
10. Transfer the above settings together with any desired screen data to the PT.
Settings on the PLC
Start up CX-Programmer. Connect the computer directly to the PLC. Create the following routing table
and transfer it to the PLC.
Item
SIOU (unit number of the PLC’s Controller
Link Unit)
Local Network
Remote Network
Relay Network
Relay Node
Setting
2
3
1
3
5
10-55
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Settings on the Computer
Start up CX-Programmer.
1.
Set the IP address of the PT in the IP Address on the Network Settings - Driver Tab Page.
2.
Click the Network Tab and make the following settings.
Item
FINS Source Address – Network (between
computer and PT)
FINS Destination Address – Network (between PT and PLC)
Node
Setting
1
3
4
10-56
Section 10 Transferring Data
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3.
After completing the settings, establish online connection and transfer the data (e.g., ladder program).
Transferring Ladder Programs
Refer to the manual for the CX-Programmer for details on transferring ladder programs.
10-57
Section 11 Printing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 11
Printing
This section describes functions provided for printing.
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
Printing Project Information ....................................................................................................................11-1
Printing Page Information........................................................................................................................11-4
Previews...................................................................................................................................................11-8
Outputting to an RTF File........................................................................................................................11-9
Headers and Footers...............................................................................................................................11-10
Margins ..................................................................................................................................................11-12
Section 11 Printing
11-1 Printing Project Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-1 Printing Project Information
Project information can be printed. The information that can be printed is given below.
Information
Screen Title List
Sheet Title List
Alarm Setting List
Unit & Scale List
Password Setting
System Data (Labels, System Setting)
Details
Prints a list of screen titles.
Prints a list of sheet screen titles.
Prints a list of registered alarms and events.
Prints a list of registered numeric units and scales.
To print only registered items turn ON Print Set Item Only.
Prints a list of registered passwords.
Prints a list of label switch names and system settings.
1. Select File - Print.
2. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the Project Information Tab.
3. Select the information to be printed.
1
2
3
5
4
No.
1
Item
Include
Details
Select the information to be printed.
2
3
4
5
Printing Items List
Print to File
Inverse Print
Preview Button
Lists the items selected in No. 1, above.
Outputs the selected items to an RTF (rich text format) file instead of a printer.
Reverses black and white when printing.
Click this button to see a preview of the printed image.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Project information will be printed normally even if Reverse black and white is selected.
4. Click the OK Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
5. Click the OK Button to start printing.
11-1
Section 11 Printing
11-1 Printing Project Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-1-1 Printing Samples
Some samples of printer output are shown below.
Project Information, Top of Each Page
The project file name and project title are printed.
Screen/Sheet Title Lists
Only the titles of screen pages that have been created are printed.
Alarm Setting List
High
Middle
Unit and Scale Settings
11-2
Section 11 Printing
11-1 Printing Project Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Password Settings
System Data
11-3
Section 11 Printing
11-2 Printing Page Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-2 Printing Page Information
User screen information can be printed. The following information can be printed.
Item
Screen Hard Copy
Functional Object List
Property Setting
Details
Prints a hardcopy of the screen.
Prints a list of the functional objects in each screen.
Prints a list of the properties of the functional objects in each screen.
1. Select File - Print.
2. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the Page Information Tab and select the range to
be printed.
3. Select the information and ranges to be printed. (Click the Details Button to set the information to
be printed.)
1
2
3
4
6
5
11-4
Section 11 Printing
11-2 Printing Page Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Item
Include
Print
All
Pages
Printing Items List
Print to File
Inverse Print
Details
Select the information to be printed.
Click the Details Button to display the following dialog box and select the information to be printed.
Select the range of screens to be printed from the following options.
Prints information on all screens that are used.
Prints information on the specified screens.
Lists the items selected in No. 1, above.
Outputs the selected items to an RTF (rich text format) file instead of a printer.
Reverses black and white when printing.
Example:
Normal
display
6
Preview Button
Reverse black
and white display
Click this button to see a preview of the printed image.
4. Click the OK Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
5. Click the OK Button to start printing.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Project information will be printed normally even if Inverse Print is selected.
11-5
Section 11 Printing
11-2 Printing Page Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-2-1 Printing Samples
Some samples of printer output are shown below.
Project Information, Top of Each Page
The screen page number and screen title are printed.
Screen Hard Copy
Functional Object List
Property Settings
The property settings on each tab page are printed.
11-6
Section 11 Printing
11-2 Printing Page Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ All property information for objects will be printed for property settings. This may result in a large
number of pages being printed.
It is recommended that the Functional Object List is used to more efficiently check object settings.
The Functional Object List can be saved to a CSV file, which can also be printed.
Select Tools - Functional Object List, select the desired range, and click the Save Button to save
the Functional Object List to a CSV file. Refer to 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used for details on
operating procedures.
♦ With data block tables, only the settings for each tab page in the Property Settings Dialog Box are
printed. Settings for each data block field (e.g., communications addresses, data formats, keypads)
are not printed.
11-7
Section 11 Printing
11-3 Previews
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-3 Previews
Previews can be displayed of the printer output for project information or page information.
1. Select the items to be printed in the Print Dialog Box.
2. Click the Preview Button.
A preview window will be displayed. Operating procedures for the preview window are the same as
those for the standard Windows® preview window.
Example for Printing Page Information
3. To return to the Print Dialog Box from the Preview Window, click the Print Button in the Preview
Window.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The header and footer information can also be checked on the preview. Refer to 11-5 Headers and
Footers for information on headers and footers.
♦ To close the Preview Window and Editing Window, click the Close Button in the Preview Window.
11-8
Section 11 Printing
11-4 Outputting to an RTF File
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-4 Outputting to an RTF File
The selected project or page information can be printed to an RTF (rich text format) file. RTF files can
be edited with MS Word and other word processing software.
The procedure for outputting to an RTF file is as follows:
1. Select the items to be output to the RTF file in the Print Dialog Box.
2. Select Print to File.
3. Click the OK Button.
4. The dialog box shown below will be displayed.
Specify the directory and file name where the RTF file will be saved, and click the Save Button.
11-9
Section 11 Printing
11-5 Headers and Footers
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-5 Headers and Footers
Headers and footers can be added to the documents to be printed.
The header is the margin at the top of the page and the footer is the space at the page where the
page number, date, time, and text strings can be printed.
A sample of a printed header and footer is shown below.
(1) Date (2) Time (3) Project name (4) Page number (5) Text string
1
2
00/05/0515:54:21
3
5
Project 1
Text
Header
10
Text
Footer
4
5
1. Select the Header Tab or the Footer Tab in the Print Dialog Box.
2. Select the items to insert into the header/footer and the locations for the items.
1
2
11-10
Section 11 Printing
11-5 Headers and Footers
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
Item
Position
Details
The insertion position for text strings in headers and footers can be set to left, center, or right.
Items
Use the following procedure to set the items to insert.
1. Place the cursor at the insertion position.
2. Select the item to insert from the combo box and click the Add Button.
“&” followed by the printing item name will appear in the input field. "&" does not have to
be added when inputting character strings.
Example: The following settings will produce the header and footer shown in the previous
sample.
Header
Footer
11-11
Section 11 Printing
11-6 Margins
NS-Designer Operation Manual
11-6 Margins
Set the distances from the edge of the paper to the printed characters. The project or page information
will be printed inside the area bounded by the margins. The header and footer will be printed in the
margins.
1. Select the Margins Tab of the Print Dialog Box.
2. Set the width of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.
1
2
No.
1
2
Item
Units
Margins
Details
Select centimeters or inches for the margins set in item 2, below.
Set the width of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.
Each margin can be set to between 0 and 10 centimeters (0 and 4 inches).
11-12
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 12
Importing/Exporting CSV Files
This section describes the methods used to import and export property information for functional objects as CSV
files.
The CSV files that are exported can be edited using spreadsheet software or a text editor and then reimported to
set functional object properties in a "batch" operation.
The following items can be edited in the CSV files.
• Address settings
• Comment settings
• Label settings
Functional objects cannot be added or deleted.
12-1 Exporting CSV Files ................................................................................................................................12-1
12-2 Editing CSV Files ....................................................................................................................................12-2
12-3 Importing CSV Files ................................................................................................................................12-3
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-1 Exporting CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
12-1 Exporting CSV Files
The property information for functional objects in the entire project or for selected screens can be exported to a CSV file.
1. Select File - Export CSV File.
2. The Export CSV File Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the range to be exported and then click the OK Button.
Add a checkmark to start the
spreadsheet software automatically
and open the CSV file when it is
exported.
A dialog box to specify the location in which to save the CSV file will be displayed.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ When exporting CSV files on Windows 2000 or XP, Unicode or ASCII can be selected as the output
code. To translate a label, for example from Japanese into Chinese, using Excel, select Unicode.
Unicode, however, is not supported for Windows 95, 98, and NT, i.e., the output code is always
ASCII (multibyte). Windows 2000 or XP is required to specify Unicode.
For details, refer to 13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export
Function.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Edit CSV file after exporting can be turned ON when exporting to the CSV file to automatically start
the application associated with the CSV extension. If the executable file for the associated application cannot be found, the following error message will be displayed.
Specify the executable file to start the application and open the exported CSV file.
12-1
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-2 Editing CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
12-2 Editing CSV Files
CSV files can be edited with spreadsheet software or a text editor.
In the CSV file, the labels, comments, and addresses set for the functional objects can be edited.
1. Open the CSV file that was exported to the spreadsheet software or text editor.
If Edit CSV file after exporting was turned ON when exporting to the CSV file, the spreadsheet
software or text editor associated with the CSV extension will be started and the file will be opened
automatically.
NS-Designer internal information
Project file name
Screen file name
Functional object types and settable
properties
Screen page
number
Property settings input field
ID number
Example 1: Changing the write address for an ON/OFF button from $B0 to $B10.
Example 2: Setting the label for a command button to "Screen 1."
2. After editing, confirm that the extension of the filename is CSV and save the file.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Objects and screens cannot be added or deleted from the CSV file.
♦ When the file is closed, a message warning that some changes may be lost if the file is saved in the
current format may be displayed. This will not adversely affect PT operation.
♦ The file contains internal information required by the NS-Designer when the file is imported
(****VER3). Do not edit this information.
12-2
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-3 Importing CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
12-3 Importing CSV Files
CSV files that have been edited externally can be reimported into the NS-Designer to change the
property information of the entire project or selected screens. An error check will be performed on the
CSV file when importing.
1. Select File - Import CSV File.
2. The Import CSV File Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the range to be imported and then click the OK Button.
3. A dialog box will be displayed to select the CSV file to import.
Specify the file and click the Open Button.
4. A dialog box to notify that the import operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the OK
Button.
12-3
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-3 Importing CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Validation
An error list will be displayed if any errors are found during validation when importing. To edit the CSV file, click
the Edit CSV Button. The spreadsheet software or text editor will be started and the imported CSV file will be
opened.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Any of the following operations in CSV file editing will cause errors when importing a CSV file.
1. Deleting rows or columns
2. Adding rows or columns
3. Changing or deleting the NS-Designer internal information on line 1 (****VER3)
4. Changing project file names, screen page file names, or screen page numbers
5. Changing functional object ID numbers
6. Changing property names
3. NS-Designer internal information
4. Project file name
4. Screen page file name
5. Functional object ID number
4. Screen page number
6. Property name
♦ Do not save CSV files in Unicode. An error will occur if CSV files saved in Unicode are imported.
12-4
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-3 Importing CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No.
1
2
Details
Displays the line number in the CSV file data where the error was found.
Displays the error number. Refer to the following table for details.
Error
No.
1
2
3
4
5
3
Details
Address or label
setting is not correct.
Format error in imported CSV file.
Insufficient memory. Settings contained in CSV file
cannot be imported.
Could not open the
CSV file. CSV file
could not be imported.
A project file name
or screen file name
specified in the
CSV file does not
exist.
Countermeasure
1. Confirm that addresses are set within the range of the number
of addresses set in the System Settings.
2. Confirm that the format of address settings is correct.
3. Confirm that none of the labels are too long.
Check that the imported file is in CSV format.
Close any unnecessary applications and re-execute the import
operation.
Check that the file is not being used by another application. If the
file is being used by another application, close the file and then reexecute the import operation.
Refer to the following and insert the project file names or screen file names.
Column A
Column B
Column C
Row 1
1
Row 2
2
Columns are A, B, and C in order from the left. Rows are 1, 2, and
3 in order from the top.
1. The project file name is specified in the B column in the rows
with a "1" in the A column. (The version is specified in row 1 of
the B column, however, so the project file name is specified in
row 2.)
Format: ***project name
Example: If the project name is "Test": ***Test
2. The screen file name is specified in the C column in the rows
with a "2" in the A column. (The project file name is specified
in row 1 of the B column, however, so the screen file name is
specified in row 3.)
Format: **PNLPG screen page number/sheet page number.IPW
Screen page numbers are 3-digit hexadecimal numbers starting from 000.
Sheet page numbers are 3-digit hexadecimal numbers in the
range FFF (page number 0) to FF6 (page number 9).
Example: If the screen page number is 16:
**PNLPG010.IPW
Example: If the sheet page number is 3: **PNLPGFFC.IPW
Details on the error that was detected will be displayed. The format is as follows:
Row number, screen page number, ID number, and error detection identifier
For the previous dialog box, there is a mistake in the CSV format of the Numeral Display Object with
ID number NUM0003 located on screen page number 0 on line 9.
12-5
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
12-3 Importing CSV Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Applying Attributes
When importing a CSV file of screen data that has been set using multiple label settings, the specified
label attributes can be applied to all the labels.
1
2
No.
1
2
Item
Apply the text
attributes of
specified label
No.
Label
Details
Select to apply attributes. If the number of set labels is 1, this option is disabled.
Select the name of the label to which the attributes are to be applied.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ The following items are affected when label properties are applied.
• Font name
• Font size
• Font style
• Vertical position
• Horizontal position
• Text color
♦ If label attributes are applied to a CSV file that has been reedited, such as by adding screen data,
and then imported after label attributes were applied, the label attributes will also be applied to the
previous data for the selected label name.
12-6
Section 13 Multi-language Display
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Section 13
Multi-language Display
This section describes the settings required for multi-language display on the PT screen using the label switching
function or the indirect specification function, or by importing/exporting CSV files.
13-1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................13-1
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens ...............................................................................................13-2
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
13-1 Overview
Multi-language displays use Unicode for the character information displayed in a screen. This enables
switching the screen between different languages, such as Japanese, English, and Chinese.
NS-series PTs use the label switching function, the object character string indirect reference function
(e.g., for list selection or text), and the CSV file import/export function to implement multi-language
displays.
A computer environment (Windows 2000 or Window XP) that supports creating Unicode data is required for multi-language displays.
This section describes the settings required for multi-language display on the PT screen.
13-1
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
The following methods can be used to create screens that allow multi-language display.
1. Input multi-language characters in NS-Designer property settings.
2. Display multi-language characters using indirect object specification.
3. Create multi-language display screens using the CSV import/export function.
13-2-1 Inputting Multi-language Characters in NS-Designer Property
Settings
Settings on the PC
In order to create screen data with NS-Designer using the multi-language function, it is necessary to
perform Windows settings beforehand. The settings are made from the Windows Control Panel. The
actual settings required depend on the input language. Perform settings in the way indicated in the
following table.
Language used
Japanese
Input method
IME (MS-IME, ATOK, etc.)
Western European languages
(German, Spanish, etc.)
Character Map
Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul
On-screen Keyboard
IME (MS-PinYin98, etc.)
PC setting
Not required (Use standard setting.)
Not required (Use standard setting.)
Additional setting for input locale
Additional setting for input locale
(input system setting)
Note: The PC settings are used by other functions as well and so be sure to make these settings before creating
a multi-language display screen.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Use Windows 2000 or XP when creating multi-language screen data with NS-Designer. The creation of multi-language screen data is not possible with Windows 95, 98, ME, or NT.
13-2
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Setting the Input Locale for Western European Languages
The windows shown in the following explanations are for Windows 2000.
1. Open Control Panel – Regional Options and select the Input Locales Tab Page. Click the Add
Button.
• In Windows XP, open Control Panel – Regional Options and select the Languages Tab
Page. Click the Details Button under Text services and input languages.
2. The following window will be displayed. Select the language to be input under Input locale (Input
language in Windows XP) and click the OK Button.
3. Switch between input locales is automatically set under Hot keys for input locales. Also the Enable
indicator on taskbar option at the bottom of the window is automatically selected. If the setting is
None, change the setting with the Change Key Sequence Button (Key Settings Button in Windows XP).
13-3
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4. Click the OK Button to complete the settings.
5. After completing the settings, confirm that the indicator in the bottom right-hand corner changes
when the left Alt Key and Shift Key are pressed.
• When inputting Japanese using MS-IME:
• When inputting German using On-screen Keyboard:
In this example, German was added. Use the same procedure to add Spanish or any other western
European language. Set as many languages as required.
Setting the Input Locale for Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, and
Hangul
In order to input Asian languages, such as Chinese, the appropriate input system and fonts must be
installed. As an example, the setting procedure required for inputting Chinese using MS-PinYin98 is
explained below.
1.
Setting the System Language
Add Chinese to the system language settings.
1. Open Control Panel – Regional Options.
2. Under Language settings for the system (Code page conversion tables in Windows XP), select the Simplified Chinese option and click the OK Button. The Windows CD-ROM may be required at this point.
3. After the OK Button is pressed, a prompt asking whether or not to restart Windows will be dis-
13-4
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
played. Restart Windows.
The fonts required to display Chinese characters will be displayed.
In this example, Simplified Chinese was added. Use the same procedure to add Traditional Chinese or
Hangul. Select Traditional Chinese and Korean in the list box.
2.
Adding the Input Locale
1. Open Control Panel – Regional Options, select the Input Locales Tab Page, click the Add Button, and add Chinese under Input locale.
• In Windows XP, open Control Panel – Regional Options, and select the Languages Tab
Page. Click the Details Button under Text services and input languages and add Chinese.
There are several types of Chinese input system (IME). In this example, the input system
MS-PinYin98 is selected.
Click the OK Button.
2. Switch between input locales is automatically set under Hot keys for input locales. Also the Enable
indicator on taskbar option at the bottom of the window is automatically selected. If the setting is
None, change the setting with the Change Key Sequence Button (Key Settings Button in Windows XP).
13-5
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3. Click the OK Button to complete the settings.
4. After completing the settings, confirm that the indicator in the bottom right-hand corner changes
when the left ALT Key and SHIFT Key are pressed.
• When inputting Japanese using MS-IME:
• When inputting German using On-screen Keyboard:
• When inputting Chinese using MS-PinYin98:
Inputting Multi-language Characters in NS-Designer Property Settings
The method for inputting multi-language characters in NS-Designer property settings is explained below.
1) Inputting Multi-language Characters in Property Settings Using IME
1. Select the language to be input either after clicking the indicator on the Windows taskbar or by using the Alt and Shift Keys.
13-6
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2. Input the required characters in the Label input box in the Property Settings Dialog Box for the required objects.
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ ”IME” stands for “Input Method Editor” and is an input system for inputting special language characters from the keyboard. It can, for example, be used to convert characters to and from those
used in Japanese. There are IME systems for different languages; for example, MS-IME2000 or
ATOK can be used for Japanese and MS-PinYin98 can be used for Chinese. There are systems
that come with Windows and systems that can be purchased separately. Refer to the software
manual or help file for details.
2) Inputting Using the On-screen Keyboard
”On-screen Keyboard” is a standard Windows program that allows a keyboard to be displayed on the
screen and characters to be input using this keyboard. It is started by selecting Programs – Accessories – Accessibility – On-screen Keyboard. Depending on the Windows setup, it may not be installed. In this case, install it from Control Panel – Add/Remove Programs – Add/Remove Windows
Components.
The following image is for input in English. If the input locale is switched to another language in the
way mentioned later, the keyboard display will change accordingly.
13-7
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3) Character Map
”Character Map” is a standard Windows program that allows characters to be selected from a list and
then input into the application as desired. It is started by selecting Programs – Accessories – System Tools – Character Map. Depending on the Windows setup, it may not be installed. In this case,
install it from Control Panel – Add/Delete Programs – Add/Delete Windows Components.
The characters outlined in the following image are the western European characters that can be input
with the NS Series. Regardless of the input locale setting mentioned later, these characters can always
be input with NS-Designer.
Note: In some circumstances, the characters outside the outlined section may not be displayed on NS-Designer
or the PT.
Character strings are input using the Character Map in the following way.
1. Insert the desired characters in Characters to copy by double-clicking them in order.
2. Once all the desired characters have been inserted, click the Copy Button.
3. Input the character string in the desired place in NS-Designer using Ctrl-V (i.e., press the Ctrl and
V Keys at the same time to copy the character string).
13-8
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
R
Reeffeerreennccee
♦ Unicode
Characters are input and displayed on a computer (not just with the NS Series), using a character
code. Each character is assigned a number based on this code.
For example, the number 41 hex is assigned to the letter “A”. Sentences can be constructed, words
can be arranged, and characters can be displayed on the screen using this code.
ISO has established a character code for alphanumeric characters (i.e., numbers and letters of the
alphabet). Windows and the NS Series use the ISO8859/1 character code to represent characters
for English, French, Italian, German, and other western European languages.
Asian languages, such as Japanese, Simplified Chinese, and Traditional Chinese use a large number of characters and there are character codes for these languages that have been defined by
standards organizations (e.g., JIS in Japan and GB in China).
“Unicode” is a character code that was established with the purpose of unifying the various western
European and Asian languages. Windows NT, 2000, and XP as well the NS Series use Unicode to
achieve multi-language display with ease.
13-2-2 Displaying Multi-language Characters Using Indirect Object
Specification
With the NS Series, multi-language display is created when Unicode-format text files for text objects
and list objects with multi-language input are read. Also, with data block tables, reading/writing of data
files is possible in Unicode format. Unicode format also allows multi-language display to be used for
the log output of alarm/event history and the import/export of CSV files.
The objects for which data can be read or displayed using Unicode are given in the following table.
Object name
Operation
Files storing character strings in Unicode format are read
and displayed as lists.
Files storing character strings in Unicode format are read
and displayed.
Data files are read and written.
CSV files edited in Unicode format can be imported and
exported. Log output to CF is also possible.
List objects
Text objects
Data block settings
Log output
In order to display multiple languages using indirect specification of object properties, the following
settings are required.
1. Create the indirectly specified Unicode text.
2. In the Property Settings Dialog Box for the objects, set the character code to Unicode.
3. Specify the indirectly specified file name in the Property Settings Dialog Box.
13-9
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Text Objects
Data Block Objects
13-10
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Alarm/Event History
13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export Function
This section describes the procedure for creating multi-language display screens using the CSV import/export function. The following diagram outlines the screen creation procedure.
Screen data
1. Create English
screen with NSDesigner.
CSV file
2. Export (Select
Unicode as the
output code.)
CSV file
English labels
Excel
Select a text file
as the file type
to read the file.
3. CSV file
After editing the English and Chinese
labels, save the file in Unicode format (.txt).
Select commadelimited or text
string.
Have the English in
the CSV file translated
into Chinese.
NS-Designer
English screen
Switch
labels
Chinese screen
4. Import
Text file
English labels
Chinese labels
Save
1. Setting the Number of Labels and Creating a Screen (Preparation)
Before creating a screen, set more than one for No. of Labels on the Project Property Dialog Box to
13-11
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
switch languages during machine operation. Then, create a screen in English in the usual way.
(The number of labels can be changed after creating a screen.)
2. Exporting Screen Data
Export the created screen data to a CSV file using NS-Designer. When doing this, select Unicode as
the output code.
3. Editing and Saving the File
Edit the CSV file with a version of Excel that supports Unicode (Excel 2000 or 2002). Make sure that
the CSV file is loaded from the Open Dialog Box opened from the File Menu on Excel and opened by
starting the Text File Wizard. If the CSV file is opened without starting the Text File Wizard (opened by
drag-and-drop or by associating the file type with the program), according to Excel specifications,
Unicode data may not be loaded correctly and garbled characters and improper line-feed may appear.
Save the data as Unicode text (extension .txt).
4. Importing the Text File
Importing the converted file using NS-Designer completes creation of the multi-language display
screen. Transfer it to the PT and confirm whether the input labels can be displayed correctly in each
language by switching labels.
Procedure for Creating Screens
1. Create the screen data in English beforehand.
Open the Settings Menu and set the No. of Labels field in the Project Property Dialog Box to 2 min.
2. After creating the screen data, export the project data to a CSV file.
• Select Export CSV File from the File Menu.
13-12
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The following screen will be displayed. Select Unicode for the output code.
Click the OK Button and specify the name of the file to be exported. Finally, click the Save Button to
complete exporting the data to the CSV file.
3. Exported CSV files are read using Excel. Select Open from the File Menu in Excel and then select
the CSV file to be edited in the dialog box. Specify Text Files in the Files of type field, and then
open the selected file.
13-13
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The Text Import Wizard will open. Select the format of the original data in the Original data type field
and click the Next > Button to proceed to the next step.
Deselect Tab in the Delimiters field, and select Comma. Click the Next > Button to proceed to the
next step.
Select all the rows in the Data preview field, and select Text in the Column data format field.
13-14
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Input the translation details below the cell of the label name corresponding to the language to be
used in the display.
After editing is completed, save the file. Specify Unicode Text in the Files of type field.
4. Import text files using NS-Designer. Always check whether the project is the pre-edited version
before importing the file. When the dialog box for completing the import operation is displayed,
screen creation allowing multiple display languages will be completed.
Open the project again with NS-Designer. When the label is switched, the translated version of the label will be displayed.
13-15
Section 13 Multi-language Display
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Original language
Translated language
13-16
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendices
These appendices provide reference information for using the NS-Designer. Refer to them as required.
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
Appendix 9
Quick Reference.......................................................................................................................... A-1
Objects ...................................................................................................................................... A-12
Shortcut Keys............................................................................................................................ A-16
Version Information.................................................................................................................. A-17
Resource Report........................................................................................................................ A-18
Error Messages ......................................................................................................................... A-19
Connecting Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. A-26
Details of CLK Status ............................................................................................................... A-28
Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products ....................................... A-31
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1
Quick Reference
This appendix lists where to look for information on the various functions of the NS-Designer.
"Programming Manual" refers to the NS Series Programming Manual (Cat. No. [email protected]) and "Cross
Reference" refers to the NS Series Cross-Reference provided on the NS-Designer CD.
Fixed
objects
Item
Displaying lines, arrows, and polylines
Displaying rectangles
Displaying triangles,
trapezoids, diamonds,
and other polygons
Displaying circles and
ovals
Displaying an arc
Displaying a sector
Filling fixed objects
Procedure
Fixed Object - Line or Polyline
Reference
Section 5-2
Fixed Object - Rectangle
Fixed Object - Polygon
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Fixed Object - Circle/Oval
Section 5-2
Fixed Object - Arc
Fixed Object - Sector
Tiling Tab Page on the Fixed Object Properties Dialog Box (Settings - Object Properties)
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Programming
Manual Section 2-6
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Section 5-13
Displaying bitmap data
Display a bitmap object (Functional Object - Bitmap).
JPEG files can also be displayed.
Using the same fixed
object in more than
one application
1. Select a registered object and then register it as an object in
the library using Tools - Register Library.
2. Display the library object using Tools - Use Library.
1. Create image data using a BMP or JPEG file.
2. Display a bitmap object (Functional Object - Bitmap).
Displaying special
symbols and characters
Displaying the same
graphic in many locations or on many
screens
Changing displayed
objects according to
specified conditions
1. Select a registered object and then register it as an object in
the library using Tools - Register Library.
2. Display the library object using Tools - Use Library.
1. Create bitmap objects (Functional Object - Bitmap).
2. Indirectly specify the display files to change the bitmap that is
displayed based on PLC or PT status.
1. Display a word button object (Functional Object - Word Button).
2. Set Select shape for the button shape on the General Tab
Page.
3. Set the shapes to be displayed when the button is pressed,
when it is not pressed, and when the set value matches on
the Color/Shape Tab Page.
Display the images using a video display object (Functional
Object – Video Display).
Video
display
Displaying video images
Text
display
Displaying text that
does not change
Display the text with a text object (Functional Object - Text).
Changing displayed
text based on PLC
status
Use a String Display and Input object (Functional Object String Display & Input).
A-1
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Section 5-13
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Item
Text
display
Screen
display
PLC bit
status
display
Procedure
Reference
Changing displayed
text based on PLC
status
Programming
1. Create a text object (Functional Object - Text).
Manual Sec2. Select Indirect Reference of String on the Label Tab Page.
The displayed text will change according to PLC or PT status. tion 2-12
Changing the disCreate a command button object set to change the screen
Programming
played screen using a (Functional Object - Command Button).
Manual Secbutton
tion 2-9
Screen n
Screen
Switch to a specific screen when a specified bit turns ON using
Changing the displayed screen when a the automatic screen change function in the alarm/event setspecified bit turns ON tings (Settings - Alarm/Event Setting).
Changing to a differ- Change the screen by writing the screen page number to $SW0
ent screen based on in system memory.
PLC or PT status
($SW0 in system memory contains the current screen page
when the screen is
number.)
changed
Create a command button object set to change the screen
(Functional Object - Command Button) and use indirect
screen page number specification from the PLC or NT to control
the screen page number according to PLC or PT status.
Creating screens with Turn ON the Use as Pop-up Screen setting on the Size/Pop-up
other screens overlaid Tab Page of the screen properties (Settings - Screen Properon them
ties).
Creating a common
1. Create the common portion of the display as a sheet (File screen to be used with
Open Sheet).
many other screens
2. Apply the sheet (File - Apply Sheet) to display it on the required screens.
Changing only a por- Create the portion to be switched as a frame object (Functional
tion of the display
Object - Frame).
based on PLC or PT
status
Controlling a lamp
Create a bit lamp object (Functional Object – Bit Lamp).
based on PLC bit
PT
ON/OFF status
Screen
PLC
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
Programming
Manual Section 2-4
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Section 4-1
Section 4-3
Section 4-4
Programming
Manual Section 2-10
Create bitmap objects (Functional Objects - Bitmap) and then Programming
Manual Secindirectly specify the display files to change the bitmap that is
tion 2-12
displayed based on PLC status.
Programming
1. Create an ON/OFF button object (Functional Object Manual SecON/OFF Button).
2. Select Select shape for the button type and then specify the tion 2-9
shapes to change to on the Color/Shape Tab Page.
Programming
Changing PLC bit
1. Create an ON/OFF button object (Functional Object Manual Secstatus by pressing a
ON/OFF Button) and set the PLC bit as a write address.
button and displaying 2. Create a bit lamp object (Functional Object - Bit Lamp) and tion 2-9
the status by lighting a
set the display address to the same PLC bit.
lamp
Controlling a displayed object based
on PLC bit ON/OFF
status
A-2
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Item
PLC bit
status
display
Procedure
Reference
Controlling displayed 1. Create an ON/OFF button object (Functional Object Programming
text based on PLC bit
Manual SecON/OFF Button).
ON/OFF status
tion 2-9
2. Turn ON the Switch Labels for Address ON/OFF setting on
the Text Tab Page of the Properties Setting Dialog Box. Then
select Link with the Specified Address ON/OFF and set the
PLC bit.
PT
Screen
PLC
When ON
ABC
Bit
DEF
When OFF
Controlling displayed
text based on PLC bit
ON/OFF status
Displaying an alarm or
event message based
on PLC bit ON/OFF
status
Create a text object and select Indirect Reference of String on
the Label Tab Page. The displayed text will change according to
ON/OFF status of the PLC bit.
1. Set the display message and the PLC bit in the alarm/event
settings (Settings - Alarm/Event Setting).
2. To display one line, create an alarm/event display object
(Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Display) and to display
a list, create an alarm/event summary history object (Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History).
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
PT
Screen
Alarm/Event Setting
Alarm/Event Summary History
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
PLC
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
•
•
•
•
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm /Event2
Recording a history of 1. Set the display message and the PLC bit in the alarm/event
PLC bit ON/OFF
settings (Settings - Alarm/Event Setting).
status, saving it in the 2. Create an alarm/event summary history object (Functional
PT, and displaying it
Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History).
for confirmation
3. Select Alarm history for the display data on the General Tab
Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
PT
Screen
Alarm/Event Summary
History
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
Alarm/Event Setting
PLC
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
•
•
•
•
PLC
word
status
display
Displaying numeric
data
Use a numeral display and input object (Functional Object Numeral Display & Input). To prevent input, turn ON Display
Expansion Tab on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Property
Setting Dialog Box and disable input.
Displaying a level
meter
Create a level meter object (Functional Object - Level Meter). Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Create an analogue meter object (Functional Object - AnaManual Seclogue Meter).
tion 2-12
Displaying an analogue meter
A-3
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Item
PLC
word
status
display
Procedure
Reference
Displaying a brokenline graph
Create a broken-line graph object (Functional Object - Broken-line Graph).
Programming
Manual Section 2-15
Displaying text string
data
Create a String Display and Input object (Functional Object String Display & Input). To prevent input, turn ON Display
Expansion Tab on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Property
Setting Dialog Box and disable input.
Create a data log graph object (Functional Object - Data Log
Graph).
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Displaying a data log
graph
Changing the color of
a lamp based on PLC
word status
Displaying detailed
information and
countermeasures by
pressing an
alarm/event summary
history object
Create a word lamp object (Functional Object - Word Lamp).
The lamp can be switched among 10 colors.
1. Turn ON the Write Alarm ID to the Specified Address setting
on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box
for an alarm/event summary history object (Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History) and set a write address for the PLC word.
2. Create text objects (Functional Object - Text).
3. Select indirect specification of the text string on the Text Tab
Page and set the same PLC word as set in step 1.
When an alarm or event occurs, an ID number will be written
to the specified address and the text will be changed according to the value of the number.
Programming
Manual Section 2-14
Programming
Manual Section 2-10
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
NS
PLC
ID write
Display
1.
2.
2.
ID
reference
3
Text string file
Label
Alarm/Event
Summary & History
Writing
data to
the PLC
Displaying recipe data 1. Create a data block table object (Functional Object – Data
Block Table).
2. Set the data block to be displayed on the General Tab Page
of the Property Settings Dialog Box.
Turning ON/OFF a
Create a button that will turn ON/OFF the specified bit using an
PLC from the PT
ON/OFF button object (Functional Object - ON/OFF Button).
PT
PLC
Screen
ON/OFF
Bit address
A-4
Programming
Manual Section 2-16
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Writing numeric values
Writing
data to
the PLC
Item
Procedure
Inputting numbers 1. Create a numeral display and input object (Functional Obfrom a tenkey
ject - Numeral Display & Input).
2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the numeral display and input
property settings, set either Standard system keypad or
Large standard system keypad as the input method.
Writing a constant 1. Create a word button object (Functional Object - Word Butwith one button
ton).
2. Select Set Value for the button operation on the General Tab
Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Reference
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
PT
Screen
PLC
123
123
Numeral Display & Input
Word Button
Incrementing or
1. Create a word button object (Functional Object - Word Butdecrementing a
ton).
value with buttons 2. Select Increment/Decrement for the button operation on the
General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Set a negative value to decrement.
Inputting a value 1. Create a numeral display and input object (Functional Obfrom a pop-up
ject - Numeral Display & Input).
window
2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box,
select Input from Pop-up Screen.
Inputting a value Create a command button object on the specified pop-up winfrom a pop-up
dow (Functional Object - Command Button).
window
Set Key button on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting
Dialog Box.
Inputting from
Create thumbwheel switch object (Functional Object thumbwheel
Thumbwheel Switch).
switches
PT
Screen
-
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
PLC
-
-
1 2 3
+ + +
123
Writing text strings
Inputting from a
virtual keyboard
1. Create a String Display and Input object (Functional Object
- String Display & Input).
2. On the Keyboard Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog
Box, set either Standard system keypad or Large standard
system keypad.
Transferring a text 1. Create a command button object (Functional Object string to a specific
Command Button).
object when a
2. Select Keyboard for the function selection on the General
button is pressed
Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
3. To send a set string, select Specified string and to send a
string that depends on the value of an address, select Indirect
Specification of String.
Writing recipe data 1. Create a data block table object (Functional Object - Data
to PLCs
Block Table).
2. Set the data block to be written on the General Tab Page of
the Property Settings Dialog Box.
A-5
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Programming
Manual Section 2-16
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Item
Writing Disabling writing nudata to meral or text strings
the PLC from PLC operations
Procedure
Reference
Programming
1. Create a numeral display and input object (Functional ObManual Secject - Numeral Display & Input) or create a string display
tion 2-8
and input object (Functional Object - String Display & Input).
2. Turn ON Display Expansion Tab on the Control Flag Tab
Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set Enable input
on other screens to Indirect. The specific bit can be used to
enable and disable writing from the numeral display and input
object or the string display and input object.
Numeral input field
Input
PT
Screen
PLC
456
Bit OFF
Functional
objects
with
buttons
Creating an original
1. Create a command button object (Functional Object tenkey and registering
Command Button).
it as a library object
2. Set Key button on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to send the specified text
string or command code to the input field for the specified
functional object.
3. Select the entire tenkey and select Tools - Register Library.
Section 5-13
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
PT
Screen
Number input field
123
Input
Changing a label using a button
7 8 9 +4 5 6 ↑
1 2 3 ↓
‚ O DCL ↵
Command buttons
(key function)
1. Create a word button object (Functional Object - Word Button).
2. Select Load Keyboard Screen for the button operation on the
General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box. Set the
set value to the label switch number.
3. Set the $SW10 as the write address.
($SW0 in system memory contains the current label switch
number.)
PLC
PT
START
Screen
START
English
$SW10
"1" is written.
Japanese
English
Label switch number 0: Japanese
Label switch number 1: English
A-6
Programming
Manual Sections 2-4 and
2-9
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Functional
objects
with
buttons
Item
Procedure
Transferring data be- 1. Create a command button object (Functional Object tween PLC words with
Command Button).
a button
2. Select Keyboard for the function selection on the General
Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
3. Select indirect specification of the text string and set the PLC
source address.
4. Create a String Display and Input object (Functional Object
- String Display & Input).
5. Set the PLC destination address for the address on the General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
6. Set the input method to Other Input Method (command button
etc) on the Keyboard Screen Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Reference
Programming
Manual Sections 2-9 and
2-11
String Display & Input
PT
Screen
ABC
PLC
ABC
Destination
ABC
Source
Command button (key function)
Stopping the PT's
buzzer with a button
1. Create a command button object (Functional Object Command Button).
2. Select Stop buzzer for the function selection on the General
Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a
button to stop the buzzer when pressed.
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
PT
Screen
Buzzer
stopped
Command button
(buzzer stop function)
Using a button to
close or move a popup screen
1. Create a command button object (Functional Object Command Button).
2. Select Pop-up Screen Control for the function selection on
the General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box and
create a button to control the pop-up screen.
Disabling a button
1. Create a button.
from a PLC operation 2. Turn ON Display Expansion Tab on the Control Flag Tab
Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set Enable input
on other screens to Indirect. The specific address can be
used to enable and disable writing the specified address from
the button.
PT
PLC
Screen
Bit OFF
Input disabled
ON/OFF button, work button, or command button
A-7
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Numeral
display
and input
and
thumbwheel
switches
Item
Procedure
Displaying a tenkey in 1. Create a numeral display and input object (Functional Oba pop-up screen by
ject - Numeral Display & Input).
touching a numeral
2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the numeral display and input
display and input obproperty settings, set either Standard system keypad or
ject
Large standard system keypad as the input method.
Reference
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
PT
Screen
Numeral input field
123
Input
Placing more than one 1. Create a table object (Functional Object - Table).
numeral display and
2. Set the movement direction for the Focus Move Direction by
input object on the
Enter Key setting on the Property Setting Dialog Box for the
same screen and
table.
moving the focus between them by pressing the Enter Key
Restricting the range 1. Create a numeral display and input object (Functional Obof numbers that can
ject - Numeral Display & Input) or create a thumbwheel
be input
switch object (Functional Object - Thumbwheel Switch).
2. Turn ON Display Expansion Tab on the Max/Min Tab Page of
the Property Setting Dialog Box and set the range of numbers
that can be input.
Numeral Displaying the unit of 1. Create a numeral display and input object (Functional Obdisplay
a numeric value and
ject - Numeral Display & Input).
and input setting the scale for
2. Select Unit or Scale on the General Tab Page in the Property
numeric data
Setting Dialog Box.
Operations
Changing the screen
grid
Copying objects that
have been created
Automatically setting
different addresses
when copying and
pasting functional
objects
Reusing screen data
Operations
Reusing screen data
Section 5-1
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Layout - Grid
Section 4-1
1. Select the object to be copied.
2. Select Edit - Copy.
3. Select Edit – Paste.
Section 5-4
Use Edit – Offset Paste to specify the offset value when pasting.
Section 5-4
1. Create a new screen (File – New Screen).
2. In the New Screen Dialog Box, select Reuse Exiting Screen.
3. Select the project containing the screen to be reused in the
Reuse Exiting Screen Dialog Box.
4. Select the screen to reuse from the screen list.
To reuse a screen from the same project when creating a new
screen, use File - Select Template Project.
1. Select the screen to be copied.
2. Select Edit - Select All - All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects.
3. Select Edit - Copy.
4. Open the destination screen.
5. Select Edit - Paste.
Section 4-2
A-8
Section 3-7
Section 5-4
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Operations
Item
Grouping multiple
objects as one object
Specifying an object
behind another object
Procedure
1. Select all of the objects to group.
2. Select Layout - Group.
Note: To return grouped objects to individual objects, select
Layout – Ungroup.
Try clicking in a different position to select the object behind.
1. Select the object in front.
2. Select Layout - Order - Bring to Back.
3. Select the object that was previously behind.
Accurately aligning
1. Select all of the objects to be aligned.
the positions of ob2. Select Layout - Align/Distribution and then select the
jects
alignment method.
Changing a range of Use the replacement function (Edit - Replace) to change a
PLC bits or words set range of bits or words set for functional objects.
for functional objects
Setting a range or
1. Select the functional objects to be set. They must all be of the
comments, labels, or
same type.
PLC bits/words for
2. Use Settings - Change Settings at Once.
functional objects
1. Export the functional object property settings to a CSV file
using File - Export CSV File.
2. Use spreadsheet software to set the properties.
3. Import the modified CSV file to NS-Designer using File - Import CSV File.
Pasting colors set for 1. Select the functional or fixed object from which to copy the
existing functional
color format.
objects or fixed ob2. Click the Color Copy/Paste Button on the Color Toolbar.
jects to other func3. Click on the destination object.
tional objects or fixed
objects
Pasting the label font 1. Select the functional or fixed object from which to copy the
formats from an exlabel font format.
isting functional object 2. Click the Copy/Paste Font Button on the Font Toolbar.
to another functional 3. Click on the destination object.
object
Using an object that
1. Select the object and register it in the library (Tool - Register
has been created in
Library).
another screen or
2. Use Tool - Use Library to position the object on the screen.
project
Creating multiple
1. Create the objects in a table object (Functional Object - Tafunctional objects of
ble).
the same type
2. Select the type of object to be created in the table as the Table type in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Confirming PLC bit
Used Tool - List Up Addresses Used.
and word status
Checking the number Use Tools - List Up Functional Objects Used.
of objects used on
each screen
Finding addresses,
Use Edit - Find.
comments, labels, or
PLC bits/words set for
functional object.
Reordering screens
Use the Move Up and Move Down Buttons under Tools Screen Maintenance.
A-9
Reference
Section 5-5
Section 5-4
Section 5-5
Section 5-5
Section 5-4
Section 5-10
Section 12
Section 2-5
Section 2-5
Section 5-13
Section 5-1
Section 5-11
Section 5-9
Section 5-4
Section 4-2
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Operations
Item
Copying screens
Procedure
Select the screen to copy and click the Duplicate Button under
Tools - Screen Maintenance.
Deleting screens
Select the screen to delete and click the Delete Button under
Tools - Screen Maintenance.
Checking the ON/OFF status of Use View - Simulate ON/OFF.
objects on screens created on
the NS-Designer
Checking addresses set for
Use View - Show Address.
functional objects on screens
created on the NS-Designer
Switching labels set for funcSelect the label to display under View - Switch Label.
tional objects on screens creSwitch between labels by selecting Previous Label or Next
ated on the NS-Designer
Label from the object creation toolbar.
Checking the settings of funcUse Tools - Functional Object List.
tional objects on a list
Finding duplicated settings of
Used Tool - Address Cross Reference.
PLC bits and words
Finding setting errors
Use Tools - Validation.
Displaying objects for which
Use View - Show Error Object.
errors were detected in validation so that they can be easily
found
Displaying the time and date
Use Functional Object - Date/Time.
Selecting the language used for
the PT’s system menus and
dialog boxes
Setting the time and date to
display
Select the language on the Select Language Tab Page of the
Project Property Dialog Box (Settings - Project properties).
Reference
Section 4-2
Section 4-2
Section 4-1
Section 4-1
Section 4-1
Section 4-1
Section 5-9
Section 5-12
Section 9
Section 4-1
Programming
Manual Section 2-17
Section 3-9
1. Create a time/data object (Functional Object - Date/Time). Programming
2. Click the object during PT operation. A dialog box will appear Manual Section 2-17
to set the time and date.
3. Input a new time and date into the dialog box to change the
time and date.
Screen
2000/06/02
2000.06.02
Requiring passwords to input
data for functional objects
1. Set the passwords under Settings - Password Setting.
2. Turn ON Display Expansion Tab on the Password Tab Page
of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set the level of password to request.
1. Turn ON Display Expansion Tab on the Write Setting Tab
Displaying a message dialog
Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for the functional
box when data is input for funcobject and turn ON Display confirmation dialog when writing.
tional objects
2. Select User Specified Message.
3. Click the Edit Message Button and set the desired message
in the Message Setting Dialog Box.
Making functional objects flash 1. Make the settings for each flicker number under Settings Flicker Setting.
2. Turn ON Display Expansion Tab on the Flicker Tab Page of
the Property Setting Dialog Box for the functional object and
set the flicker number.
A-10
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
Appendices
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Item
Making fixed objects flash
Procedure
Reference
Use the Flicker Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for Programming
each object.
Manual Section 2-6
Testing project data offline
Section 8
Use Tool - Test.
Copying project data
Use the Duplicate Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog Section 3-8
Box (File - Project Maintenance).
Deleting project data
Use the Delete Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Section 3-8
Box (File - Project Maintenance).
Backing up project data
Use the Backup Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Section 3-8
Box (File - Project Maintenance).
Restoring a project from backup Use the Restore Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Section 3-8
data
Box (File - Project Maintenance).
Copying project data to a floppy Use the Backup Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Section 3-8
disk
Box (File - Project Maintenance) and specify a floppy disk as
the backup location.
Performing calculations on the Use the macro function.
Section 6-1
PT
Changing the model of the NS- Use Settings - Change PT Model.
Section 3-10
series PT
A-11
Appendices
Appendix 2 Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 2
Object type
Switches
Objects
Object name
DIP switch, horizontal
Shape
DIP switch, vertical
Seesaw 1
Seesaw 2
Seesaw 3
Selector
Micro switch 1
Micro switch 2
Lever
Pushbutton, round
Shape changes with status
of address
ON
OFF
A-12
Appendices
Appendix 2 Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type
Switches
Object name
Pushbutton, square
Shape changes with status
of address
Shape
ON
OFF
Lamps
Round
Shape changes with status
of address
ON
OFF
Octagon
Shape changes with status
of address
ON
OFF
Square
Shape changes with status
of address
ON
OFF
Meters
7-segment LED
Level meter
Others
Frame 1
Frame 2
Actuator
Graph
A-13
Appendices
Appendix 2 Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type
Others
Object name
Conveyor
Shape
Dialog box
Robot 1
Robot 2
Others
Pipes and
Valves
Audio Switch
Tank
Valve (Handle)
Valve (Relief)
Pipe
Blower
A-14
Appendices
Appendix 2 Objects
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type
Pipes and
Valves
Object name
Hopper
Shape
Pump
Symbols
Basic
Check Box
Arrow
Valve
Pipe
Pump
A-15
Appendices
Appendix 3 Shortcut Keys
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 3
Shortcut Keys
The following shortcut keys can be used with the NS-Designer.
Menu
File
Edit
Display
Settings
Layout
Tools
Function
New Screen
Open Screen
Save Screen
Transfer Data
Print
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Offset Paste
Delete
Find
Replace
All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects
Same Functional Objects
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Previous Frame Page
Next Frame Page
Refresh
Object Properties
Edit Label
Change Settings as a Batch
Move Up
Move Down
Move Left
Move Right
Group
Ungroup
One dot shift
Validation
Validation Result
Functional Object List
Address Cross Reference
Test
Shortcut keys
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + S
Ctrl + I
Ctrl + P
Ctrl + Z
Ctrl + Y
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V
Ctrl + W
Delete
Ctrl + F
Ctrl + H
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + D (when object is selected)
Shift + PageUp
Shift + PageDown
PageUp (when frame is selected)
PageDown (when frame is selected)
F9
Enter (when functional object is selected)
Space (when functional object with label setting is selected)
Ctrl + K (when functional object is selected)
Up cursor key (when object is selected)
Down cursor key (when object is selected)
Left cursor key (when object is selected)
Right cursor key (when object is selected)
Ctrl + G (when more than one object is selected)
Ctrl + U (when grouped objects are selected)
Ctrl + ↑, →, ↓, or ← (when Snap to Grid is selected)
Ctrl + E
Ctrl + Q
Ctrl + L
Ctrl + R
Ctrl + T
A-16
Appendices
Appendix 4 Version Information
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 4
Version Information
Information on the version of NS-Designer can be displayed.
Select Help - About NS-Designer.
The NS-Designer Dialog Box will be displayed. The corresponding NS-Designer version number will be
shown in place of x.xx.
Click the OK Button to close the dialog box.
A-17
Appendices
Appendix 5 Resource Report
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 5
Resource Report
A resource report can be generated to display the file size of screen and sheet files (extension IPW).
Select Tools – Resource Report.
The Resource Report Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
No.
1
Item
Transfer file information
2
Percentage used
3
4
Free space
Project size
Details
All file names in the project are displayed along with the file byte sizes and
whether or not the file can be transferred.
All files that can be transferred are displayed, including project files, screen files,
bitmap files used on the screens, text files, etc.
If the PT system version is 1.X, the maximum size of file that can be transferred
is 1 Mbyte. Files that can be transferred to version-1.X PTs will be indicated as
"OK." Files that cannot be transferred to version-1.X PTs will be indicated as
"NG." If the system version is 2.0, there is no restriction on the size of files that
can be transferred. Any files that are corrupted will be indicated as "ERR."
The percentage of the allowable project size is displayed.
If the percentage used is larger than 100%, file transfer will not be possible. Delete unnecessary files and data to maintain file sizes at less than 100%.
The available space in the PT with no project data transferred is displayed.
The total size of all files in the project is displayed.
A-18
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6
Error Messages
The error messages displayed on the NS-Designer are listed in the following table along with probable
countermeasures (in alphabetical order).
Message
Address after replacement is not set.
Address input format is not correct. Input
address again using correct format and
applicable type (bit, word, etc).
Address is not set.
Address is not set.
Address setting after replacement is not
correct.
Address type of start address and end address is not the same.
Address will exceed limit. Pasting aborted.
Background file error.
BMP file of the compressed format is not
supported.
Cannot be set because there are already
more than 160,000 Always log points.
NS5:
Cannot be set because there are already
more then 120,000 Always log points.
Cannot be set because the logging holding
capacity has been exceeded for the number of always logging points.
Cannot create a frame inside a frame.
Cannot create any more frames.
Cannot create any more new screens.
Cannot create any more screens.
Cannot create any more.
Cannot Delete the screen file stored in NS
hardware.
Cannot establish connection with specified
communications method.
Cannot find any project files in NS hardware.
Countermeasure
Correctly designate the start address after replacement
for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.
Set the address using the correct format. The correct
address can be set by using the Address Set Dialog
Box.
Set an address in the Address Dialog Box.
Sets the communications address.
Set the start address after replacement to a value
within the proper address range.
Set the same type of address for the start address and
the end address.
Check the range of addresses that can be set and repeat the operation so that the address range is not
exceeded.
Check to see if the background file (BMP or JPEG) is
corrupted.
Use a BMP file that is not compressed.
A maximum of 160,000 points can be set to be always
logged (120,000 points for the NS5). Change the log
timing in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box, reduce the number log points, or delete addresses until
there are 160,000 or fewer points.
A maximum of 50,000 points can be set to be always
logged. Reduce the number of points to be always
logged, i.e., change the logging periods or reduce the
number of logs in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog
Box.
Position the frame outside any other frames.
Do not use more than 10 frames on one screen.
Create no more than 4,000 user screens in any one
project.
Create no more than 4,000 user screens in any one
project.
Create no more than 500 fields in any one data block.
The project in the PT may be set to read-only. Initialize
data using Screen data region format on the Data Initialization Tab Page under System Menu and transfer
the whole project.
Check the following items.
PT power supply.
Cable connection.
Is the PT started? (If it is not started, end the transfer
program and start the PT.)
Make correct settings for unset items and connect
again.
Resend the whole project.
A-19
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Message
Cannot find Project file at NS hardware.
Transmit the whole project again.
Cannot open anymore screens. Close xxx to
open new screen. Do you want to save the
changes you made to xxx?
Cannot open COM port.
Cannot perform transmission because the
memory for transmission is insufficient.
Reset NS hardware and transmit the whole
project again.
Cannot register data to 1 folder anymore.
(Max:4096). Register it to other folder.
Cannot restore to the currently edited project.
Cannot reuse the library object. It contains
the function which is not supported in the
current system version.
Cannot reuse the screen because the system project of source project is newer than
current editing project.
Cannot set screen No. 0 as a pop-up
screen.
Cannot set this address. Please set other
address.
Cannot specify this project as a template
because system version is newer than current editing project.
Cannot start up editor. Check the setting at
[Tools]-[Options]-[Editor].
Character string is not set.
CSV file xx is not correct.(Line:xx Row:xx)
Currently edited project cannot be deleted.
Data block table cannot be created on the
frame.
Data block table cannot be created on the
pop-up screen.
Data block table cannot be created on the
sheet.
Data cannot be loaded. Check whether the
IPP file and project folder name are the
same.
Countermeasure
Resend the whole project.
A maximum of 16 screens can be opened for simultaneous editing. Specify whether or not to save the applicable screen.
Close the other application and try the connection
again.
Reset the PT and transmit the whole project again.
Click the New Category Button in the Library Dialog
Box and create a new category to place the objects in.
Open another project or restart the NS-Designer and
repeat the operation.
Confirm the version of the screen currently being edited and system versions for which the library object is
supported.
Match the version of the source project and the project
you are editing, and repeat the operation.
The version can be checked on the Title Tab Page of
the Project Properties under the Settings in the NSDesigner.
Always set screen number 0 as a base screen.
Set a correct address.
Match the version of the template project with the project you are editing, and repeat the operation.
The version can be checked on the Title Tab Page of
the Project Properties under the Settings in the NSDesigner.
Specify the editor on the Editor Tab Page under Tools
- Options or check the specific executable file to be
sure that it is correct.
Set the character string to search for in the Find Dialog
Box.
Correct the specified line and row in the specified CSV
file and then try and import it again.
Open another project or restart the NS-Designer and
repeat the operation.
Create data block table objects on normal screens.
Use explorer or other search method to check whether
a folder exists with the same name as the IPP file
name.
A-20
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Message
Downloading aborted. This Project includes
the file which name contains invalid character. The characters that can be used are
alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to Z, a
to z), dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and.
Check and adjust project file.
End address is not set.
End page No. is out of range. Set a number
from 0 to 3999.
End page No. is smaller than the start page
No.
End sheet number is out of range. Set a
number from 0 to 9.
Error detected at NS hardware. (0x03a7)
Error occurred while writing to a flash
memory. Transmission failed.
Exceeding maximum/minimum limit.
Failed to create new folder.
Failed to delete.
Failed to export CSV file.
Failed to get configuration information from
the printer for NS-Designer. Settings cannot be performed for the printer.
Failed to import CSV file.
Failed to open communications with the
PLC. CX-Server reported an unknown error.
Failed to read file.
(Data Block (X) CSV File)
Failed to read project file.
Failed to register.
Failed to restore the project.
Failed to save file.
Countermeasure
There are limits on transferable file names. Check the
error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file
name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation
for text files indirectly accessed.
Correctly designate the end address for replacement in
the Replace Dialog Box.
The end page number is 3,999. Set the end page
number to a number between 0 and 3,999.
Set the start page number so that it is smaller than the
end page number.
Sheet screen page numbers must be set in the range 0
to 9.
Set the sheet screen page number to a number between 0 and 9.
Contact your OMRON service representative.
Initialize data using Screen data region format on the
Data Initialization Tab Page under System Menu and
transfer the project.
Set a number within the upper and lower limits.
The folder could not be created because of insufficient
space on the hard disk.
Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
Check to see if the specified category or file has been
opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
The file could not be saved because of insufficient
space on the hard disk. Increase the available space
on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
This message is displayed when files containing information for printer settings cannot be obtained. Reinstall
NS-Designer.
Check to be sure that the file to be imported is in CSV
format and repeat the operation.
Exit Screen Data Transfer of NS-Designer if this message appears on the CX-Server when connecting to
the PLC to send the settings for the Path Through
PLC.
The specified CSV data file does not exist. Create a
CSV data file in the project folder.
The project file may be corrupted. If there is a backup
file, restore the project file using the backup file under
Project Maintenance - File - Project Maintenance.
Check to see if the specified category in the library has
been opened by another application and repeat the
operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
Not have any free space left.
Change the Restore Destination or increase the free
space, and repeat the operation.
The file could not be created because of insufficient
space on the hard disk. Increase the available space on
the hard disk and repeat the operation.
A-21
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Message
Failed to start the CX-Server.
Failed to process the CX-Server.
Failed to use.
Failed to write a file.
(Data Block (X) CSV File)
Failed to write to a file. Check the free
space and perform writing again.
File check sum error.
The specified filename has already been
reserved in the System. Change the filename.
File not found. Please verify the correct file
name was given.
File size exceeded the maximum. Please
check the project data. (03a9)
File writing error occurred.
Frame size is not set. Please be sure to set
this item.
Frame size is out of range. Please set the
value from 0 to 16.
Functional objects overlap.
To permit overlapping, change the setting
from [Tools]-[Options].
Import data of screen page No. xx is not
found in CSV file xx.
Incorrect project is specified. Select correct
project.
Incorrect value is set for node address. Set
the value from 1 to 254.
Initialization of transmission library failed.
Memory for undoing /redoing operation is
insufficient. Increase the free memory by
closing other screens or exiting other applications etc.
More than 5,000 items have been set.
Network No. is out of range. Set the number from 1 to 127.
No items are selected.
Countermeasure
CX-Server may not be installed correctly. Refer to
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting and uninstall
CX-Server and then reinstall NS-Designer and CXServer.
CX-Server may not be installed correctly. Refer to
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting and uninstall
CX-Server and then reinstall NS-Designer and CXServer.
Check to see if the specified category or file has been
opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
The specified CSV data file does not exist. Create a
CSV data file in the project folder.
The file could not be created because of insufficient
space on the hard disk.
Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
The file is corrupted. Redo the file using backup data.
Set the output file name for the data log group to a name
other than Trend.
Correctly input an existing project name in the Open
Project Dialog Box.
The maximum size file that can be transferred is 1.44
MB. Re-execute the transfer with a file smaller than
1.44 MB.
Increase the available space in the computer.
Set the frame size on the Frame Tab Page in the Object Properties Dialog Box.
Set the frame size on the Frame Tab Page in the Object Properties Dialog Box to a number between 0 and
16.
As a rule, set functional objects so that they do not
overlap. To permit overlapping, change the setting on
the Edit/Display Tab Page under Tools - Options.
The number of screens defined in the import data is
different from the number in the project into which the
data is being imported. If there are fewer screens in the
import data, temporarily move the extra screen files to
a separate folder and repeat the operation.
Correctly input an existing project name for project
maintenance.
Set an integer within the specified range for the node
address in the Edit Host Dialog Box.
Reinstall the NS-Designer.
Increase the free memory by closing other screens or
exiting other applications and then repeating the operation.
The maximum number of alarm/events that can be
registered is 5,000. Reduce the number of alarms and
events to 5,000 or less by deleting unneeded ones
from the Alarm/Event Setting Dialog Box.
Set an integer within the specified range for the network number in the Edit Host Dialog Box.
Select an item and repeat the operation.
A-22
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Message
No. of Address to find is out of range.
No. of functional objects inside a table exceeds the maximum limit (256).
NS hardware error.
NS hardware is already connected. Restart
the NS hardware to change the communication method.
Operation failed.
Other project exists in this directory. Cannot create new one.
Please ensure that the maximum limit is not
smaller than minimum limit.
Please enter an integer between oo and
oo.
Project cannot be specified as project
name because it is being edited with NSDesigner, which has been started up already
Project file differs between transmission
source and destination. Select the whole
project and perform transmission again.
Project file name contains invalid character.
Usable characters are alphanumeric (0-9,
A-Z, a-z), dollar mark ($), underscore (_)
and.
Project file name is too long. It should be
within 42 characters.
Project name is not set.
Restore source data does not exist. Check
the data.
Screen is not open.
Screen page No. is out of range. Set a
number from 0 to 3999.
Screen size of download project is incorrect.
Set PT Memory ($B/$W) both for $SB/$SW
Allocation Address or set host memory (DM
etc.) both for them.
Setting is not completed. Please be sure to
set this item.
Countermeasure
Reset the address to search for within the allowable
range of addresses.
Reduce the number of items horizontally or vertically in
the Table Setting Dialog Box so that the total number
of functional objects is 256 or less.
Contact your OMRON service representative.
Restart the PT and make the new connection.
Check to see if the specified category or file has been
opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
Specify another folder or create a new folder in which
to save the project file.
The lower limit is higher than the upper limit. Make the
correct limit settings.
Input an integer within the specified range.
Specify another project name, or stop editing the project with NS-Designer and save the project.
Individual screen data cannot be transferred for a different project when a project already exists in the PT
(or in the specified Memory Card bank). To transfer the
screen data, transfer the entire project.
There are limits on transferable file names. Check the
error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file
name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation
for text files indirectly accessed.
There are limits on transferable file names. Check the
error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file
name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation
for text files indirectly accessed.
Specify the name of the project file to be processed.
Correctly input an existing project name for project
maintenance.
Check to see if the specification for the restore source
is correct.
Either select the entire project for the Check When
setting on the Error Check Dialog Box or open the
screens to be checked and repeat the operation.
Set the screen number to a number between 0 and
3,999.
Mount Expansion Memory to the PT or take other
steps to increase the available memory in the PT.
Alternately, reduce the size of the screen data being
transferred.
The screen data size can be confirmed using Tools Resource Report.
Set the addresses for both $SB and $SW to PT memory addresses ($B and $W) or set them both to host
memory addresses for the same host.
Specify a data block.
A-23
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Message
Sheet page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.
Specified file name contains invalid characters:
Alphanumeric (A-Z,a-z,0-9), underscore
(_), dollar mark ($), and period (,).
Specify the file name within 12 characters
(8+3 format).
Start address is larger than the end address.
Start address is not set.
Start address setting is not correct.
Start page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.
Test Tool is already started up. Cannot
start Test.
The address is out of range.
The capacity of NS hardware is insufficient.
Transmission failed.
The data is created with NS-Designer Ver.
1.0. This needs to be converted to edit with
NS-Designer Ver. 6.2. When you convert
the data to NS-Designer V1.1, it also can
be operated with the system version 1.0.
Do you want to convert the data?
Countermeasure
Set the sheet page number to a number between 0
and 9.
The specified file name contains illegal characters.
Change the file name to one that uses only the following characters.
Alphanumerics (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), underscores (_), dollar
signs ($), and periods (.).
Specify a file name of 12 characters or less (8+3 format) when specifying file names in dialog boxes used
to set properties, e.g., when making list selections.
Set the start address so that it is smaller than the end
address.
Correctly designate the start address for replacement
in the Replace Dialog Box.
Set a correct address.
Screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to
3,999.
Set the screen page number to a number between 0
and 3,999.
Stop the test tool and then restart it.
Set an address that is within range in the Address
Dialog Box.
Reduce the amount of screen data and transfer the
project again.
You are attempting to use NS-Designer Ver. 6.2 to edit
a project that was saved using NS-Designer Ver. 1.0.
To convert the data from Ver. 1.0 to Ver. 1.1, which
can be edited using NS-Designer Ver. 6.2, click the
Yes Button. To leave the data unconverted, click the
No Button and edit the project using NS-Designer Ver.
1.0.
The file name is incorrect. Input correct file
name.
The number of characters exceed the limit.
Set characters no more than X characters.
The object that cannot be arranged on the
pop-up screen is contained.
Input a file name in the correct format.
The selected PT model and System Version do NOT match.
Select a PT model and System Version that match.
Refer to Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different
Versions of NS-series Products for details on supported combinations.
Check the data block field storage format and the setting data format.
Sheet screen page numbers must be set in the range 0
to 9.
Set the sheet screen page number to a number between 0 and 9.
Input a value within the correct range.
Check the NS-Designer version being used, upgrade
to match the version of the CSV file, as required, and
then import the CSV file again.
The setting data format is different.
The start sheet number is out of range. Set
a number from 0 to 9.
The value is out of range.
The version of CSV file is newer than the
project you are editing. Import CSV file
cannot be performed.
Set no more than the specified number of characters.
Screens with video display objects or data block tables
cannot be converted to pop-up screens. Either delete
the video display objects and data block tables or do
not perform the pop-up screen setting.
A-24
Appendices
Appendix 6 Error Messages
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Message
This object can be created only one for
each screen.
This program is already started up.
Time-out error occurred.
Check the cable. Perform transmission
again after restarting NS hardware.
To reference a string indirectly, set both
File Name and Address for Selecting a
Line.
Total No. of Always log addresses exceeds
the maximum limit of 50.
Total number of functional object will exceed the limit. Cannot continue operation.
Transfer already in progress.
Video display cannot be created on the
frame object.
Video display cannot be created on the
pop-up screen.
Video display cannot be created on the
sheet.
Countermeasure
Only one video display object or data block table can
be created per screen.
Multiple copies of the transfer program cannot be
started. Use the transfer program that is already
started.
Check the following items.
PT power supply.
Cable connection.
Is the PT started? (If it is not started, end the transfer
program and start the PT.)
When transferring via serial communications, check
the communications cable and the COM port that is
being used. When using Ethernet, make sure that a PT
with the node address specified for the transfer actually
exists.
Specify both a file name for storing the text string and
an address for specifying the file line on the Label Tab
Page in the Text Property Setting Dialog Box.
A maximum of 50 addresses can be set for standing
logging. Either change the log timing in the Data Log
Group Setting Dialog Box or delete addresses that
have been registered until there are 50 or fewer Always log addresses.
Do not use more than 1,024 functional objects on one
screen.
Finding Out the Number of Functional Objects
The number of functional objects that is being used
can be found using Tools –
List Up Functional Objects Used.
Check the destination node.
Create video display objects on normal screens.
A-25
Appendices
Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 7
Connecting Cable Specifications
There are three methods that can be used for data communications between the NS-Designer (computer) and the NS-series PT.
• Serial communications
• Ethernet
• Memory Cards
Refer to the following information when preparing a connecting cable for the NS-Designer. A cable is
not required if Memory Cards are going to be used.
A-7-1 Serial Cable
The cable is wired as described next depending on the type of RS-232C connector on the computer
being connected.
• Computers with a 25-pin Connector
Computer side
PT tool connector
Shield wire
Connector hood
Connector hood
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Model
Remarks
25-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)
9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)
25-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)
9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)
Multi-core shielded cable (Fujikura Ltd.)
Multi-core shielded cable (Hitachi Cable Ltd.)
XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901
XM2S-2511
XM2S-0911
AWG28 x 5PIFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P x 28AWG
A-26
Appendices
Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications
NS-Designer Operation Manual
•
Computers with a 9-pin Connector
Computer side
PT tool connector
Connector hood
Shield wire
Connector hood
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Model
XM2D-0901
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0913
AWG28 x 5PIFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P x 28AWG
Connector hood
Cable
Remarks
9-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)
9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)
9-pin mm-pitch screw by OMRON
9-pin inch-pitch screw by OMRON
Multi-core shielded cable (Fujikura Ltd.)
Multi-core shielded cable (Hitachi Cable Ltd.)
Note: Use a connector hood on the computer-end connector with screws that match the specifications of the
connector on the computer.
A-7-2 Ethernet
• Ethernet Connector Pin Arrangement
1 ⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
⋅
⋅ 8
Signal name
Name
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
TD+
TD−
RD+
NC
NC
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
RD−
NC
NC
A-27
Appendices
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 8
Address
(start address = n)
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+6
Details of CLK Status
Bit
Status
0 to 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Error Information
0 to 14
15
Local Data Link Participation
Status
Polling Node Address,
Startup Node Address
Network Participation Status
A-28
Contents
Not used
1: Node address setting range error
1: Duplicate node address
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Hardware error
1: Communications controller send error
Not used
Not used
1: Error log exists
1: Polling node address
1: Startup node address
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Node 6
Node 7
Node 8
Node 9
Node 10
Node 11
Node 12
Node 13
Node 14
Node 15
Node 16
Node 17
Node 18
Node 19
Node 20
Node 21
Node 22
Node 23
Node 24
Node 25
Node 26
Node 27
Node 28
Node 29
Node 30
Node 31
Node 32
(Reserved)
Not used
0: Local node data link not participating
or data link inactive
1: Local node data link participating
Appendices
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Address
(start address = n)
n+7
n+8
n+9
n + 10
n + 11
n + 12
n + 13
n + 14
n + 15
n + 16
n + 17
n + 18
n + 19
n + 20
n + 21
n + 22
n + 23
Bit
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Status
Data Link Status
Data Link Normal Operation
Status
A-29
Contents
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Node 6
Node 7
Node 8
Node 9
Node 10
Node 11
Node 12
Node 13
Node 14
Node 15
Node 16
Node 17
Node 18
Node 19
Node 20
Node 21
Node 22
Node 23
Node 24
Node 25
Node 26
Node 27
Node 28
Node 29
Node 30
Node 31
Node 32
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Node 6
Node 7
Node 8
Node 9
Node 10
Node 11
Node 12
Node 13
Node 14
Node 15
Node 16
Appendices
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Address
(start address = n)
n + 24
n + 25
n + 26
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Status
Data Link Normal Operation
Status
Data Link Error Detection
Status
Data Link Error Detection
Status
A-30
Contents
Node 17
Node 18
Node 19
Node 20
Node 21
Node 22
Node 23
Node 24
Node 25
Node 26
Node 27
Node 28
Node 29
Node 30
Node 31
Node 32
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Node 6
Node 7
Node 8
Node 9
Node 10
Node 11
Node 12
Node 13
Node 14
Node 15
Node 16
Node 17
Node 18
Node 19
Node 20
Node 21
Node 22
Node 23
Node 24
Node 25
Node 26
Node 27
Node 28
Node 29
Node 30
Node 31
Node 32
Appendices
Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 9
Converting Data between Different Versions of
NS-series Products
The following tables show the data compatibility between different versions of NS-series products.
Hardware and System Program
The versions of the system program that can be installed in the PT vary with the model. The possible
combinations are shown in the following table. Use a system program that can be installed for the
hardware used.
Item
NS12/NS10/NS7
System Program Ver. 1.X
System Program Ver. 2.X
System Program Ver. 3.X
System Program Ver. 4.X
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
System Program Ver. 5.X
System Program Ver. 6.0
System Program Ver. 6.2
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
NS12-V1/NS10-V1/NS8V1/NS5-V1
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported (except for
the NS5-V1)
Supported
Supported
Supported
NS5-V2
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
System Program and Screen Data Version
The versions of screen data that can be used on the PT depend on the version of the system program
installed there. The “screen data version” is the version of the program selected when screen data is
created on NS-Designer. The combinations that can be used on the PT are shown in the following table. Screen data versions are upwardly compatible.
Item
Screen data version: Ver. 1.X
Screen data version: Ver. 2.X
Screen data version: Ver. 3.X
Screen data version: Ver. 4.X
Screen data version: Ver. 5.X
Screen data version: Ver. 6.0
Screen data version: Ver. 6.2
System
Program
Ver. 1.X
Supported
System
Program
Ver. 2.X
Supported
System
Program
Ver. 3.X
Supported
System
Program
Ver. 4.X
Supported
System
Program
Ver. 5.X
Supported
System
Program
Ver. 6.0
Supported
System
Program
Ver. 6.2
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
A-31
Appendices
Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products
NS-Designer Operation Manual
NS-Designer and Screen Data Version
The versions of screen data that can be read and created depend on the NS-Designer version. Convert the data as required with NS-Designer before reading it.
Item
Screen data
version: Ver. 1.X
Screen data
version: Ver. 2.X
Screen data
version: Ver. 3.X
Screen data
version: Ver. 4.X
Screen data
version: Ver. 5.X
Screen data
version: Ver. 6.0
Screen data
version: Ver. 6.2
NSDesigner
Ver. 1.X
Reading
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
NSDesigner
Ver. 2.X
Conversion to
screen
data version 2.X
required
Reading
supported
NSDesigner
Ver. 3.X
Conversion to
screen
data version 2.X
required
Reading
supported
NSDesigner
Ver. 4.X
Conversion to
screen
data version 2.X
required
Reading
supported
NSDesigner
Ver. 5.X
Reading
supported
NSDesigner
Ver. 6.0
Reading
supported
NSDesigner
Ver. 6.2
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
supported
Reading
not
supported
Reading
supported
A-32
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V074-E1-06
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer
to the previous version.
Revision code
Date
01
02
May 2002
January 2003
03
April 2003
04
October 2003
05
July 2004
06
February 2005
Revised content
Original production
Addition of data transfer passing through the networks
Addition of Switch Box function
Contents revised to reflect the upgrade from version 2.0 to
version 3.0
Addition of information related to the printing function
Addition of information related to “V1” models
Addition of information related to other version upgrades
Addition of information related to NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 upgrade.
Addition of information related to NS5 PTs.
Addition of information related to NS-Designer Ver. 6.0 upgrade.
Addition of information related to the NS5-V2 Series.
Addition of information related to other version upgrades.
Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed
part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by
Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). Seller hereby
objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase order or other
documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please
contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales
from your Omron company.
2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by
Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment.
3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of
invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and
duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's
payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller.
4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing.
5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all
costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Goods.
6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general
real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon,
imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or
indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation,
consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties
and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and
remitted by Buyer to Seller.
7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory
to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory
security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise
comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability
and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold
hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it
by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts.
8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation
unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in
connection therewith.
9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery
resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods,
strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to
machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the
requirements of any government authority.
10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller:
a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller;
b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier
shall constitute delivery to Buyer;
c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of
the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a
security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer;
d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only.
e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal
handling and extra charges apply to special conditions.
11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the
Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to
Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from
Seller in the condition claimed.
12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the
Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed
in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS.
BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of
any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obligation hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer
responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the noncomplying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount
equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller
be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses
regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were
properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not
be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods
in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system
assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any
advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be
construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE
GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY,
NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of
Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted.
14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and
its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and
expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises
or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in
any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at
its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle
any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that
any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of
another party.
15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is
the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to
duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling
shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials
supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and
strictly prevent disclosure to any third party.
16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right
and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver
of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder
without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the
entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties.
(d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such
provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have
no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this
invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".
Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use
1. Suitability of Use. Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the
Buyer's application or use of the Good. At Buyer's request, Seller will provide
applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations
of use which apply to the Good. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the
end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are
some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given.
This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good,
nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good:
(i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical
interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document.
(ii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety
equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government
regulations.
(iii) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or
property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to
this Good.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS
RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM
AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT
THE SELLER'S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR
THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
2. Programmable Products. Seller shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable Good, or any consequence thereof.
3. Performance Data. Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a
guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty.
It may represent the result of Seller's test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the
Seller's Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be
changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed,
or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Good may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special
part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your
application. Please consult with your Seller's representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Good.
5. Errors and Omissions. The information in this catalog has been carefully
checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed
for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors, or omissions.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 Commerce Drive
Schaumburg, IL 60173
847.843.7900
For US technical support or
other inquiries: 800.556.6766
OMRON CANADA, INC.
885 Milner Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8
416.286.6465
OMRON ON-LINE
Global - http://www.omron.com
USA - http://www.omron.com/oei
Canada - http://www.omron.ca
V074-E1-06 4/05
©2005 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Printed in the U.S.A.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement